The present work is an expansion of a series of elementary lessons developed gradually during twenty years of teaching Sahidic Coptic at the college level. The Lessons are designed to provide a carefully graded introduction to the basic grammar and vocabulary of the language. The content of the Lessons and the mode of presentation were dictated by purely practical pedagogical considerations; the book is in no way intended to be a scientific reference grammar. The Reading Selections are furnished with glosses designed to facilitate the translation to unsimplified material. A thorough mastery of these and the Lessons will bring the student to the level at which any Sahidic text of average difficulty can be read with no trouble. The emphasis on basic matters has necessitated the omission of much technical linguistic data not immediately relevant to the needs of the average beginning student. Those who are interested in a detailed study of the phonology, in the relationship of Sahidic to the other Coptic dialects, or in the historical development of Coptic from ancient Egyptian may consult the standard works on these subjects as cited in the Bibliography.
A special effort has been made to provide a Glossary that will be useful to the student beyond his first year's study. In addition to covering the words used in the present text, the Glossary is intended to contain the full vocabulary of the Sahidic New Testament, including most associated phrases and idioms, as well as a generous selection of lexical items from other Biblical and literary texts. Deliberately excluded from the Glossary are words of a specialized nature, such as the names of plants, vessels, implements, drugs, and animals occurring only in technical texts that usually provide little clue to their precise meanings; nor has any effort been made to include the unusual lexical usage of Shenute. For these items the reader must consult the indispensible A Coptic Dictionary of W. E. Crum, which, together with M. Wilmet, Concordance du nouveau testament sahidique, is the main authority for the Glossary included here.
I would like to express my sincere thanks to my colleague, George W. MacRae, the Charles Chauncey Stillman Professor of Roman Catholic Theological Studies, Harvard Divinity School, for encouraging me to undertake this work and for his helpful comments on a large portion of the manuscript; to Mr. Gary A. Bisbee, for the exceptional skill and care with which he prepared the final copy for publication; to Mr. Watson E. Mills, Director of the Mercer University Press, for his part in initiating and publishing this work.
Thomas O. Lambdin
Cambridge, Mass.
June 1982
The names of specific conjugations and inflected verbal forms are capitalized throughout the book.
The political unification of Egypt took place around the beginning of the third millennium B.C. with the establishment of the First Dynasty at Memphis. Soon afterward written records began to appear in the hieroglyphic script, which together with its cursive derivatives, hieratic and demotic, remained the sole medium for writing the Egyptian language until the end of the second century A.D. At that time, the missionaries of the Church, then centered in Alexandria, undertook the translation of the Bible from Greek into Egyptian in order to facilitate their task of Christianizing the country. They abandoned the three-thousand-year-old hieroglyphic writing system, probably as much because of its complexity and imperfections as for its "heathen" associations, and chose instead to employ a modified form of the Greek alphabet. Egyptian in this new guise is known as Coptic, a modern term derived from Arabic qubṭî, itself a corruption of the Greek word (ai)gúpti(os), Egyptian.
The conquest of Egypt by Alexander the Great in 332 B.C. and the subsequent Greek-speaking administration of the country under the Ptolemies led to the thorough Hellenization of Lower (i.e. Northern) Egypt. Egyptian-Greek bilingualism was apparently commonplace in the Delta, and it is probable that much Greek technical, legal, and commercial terminology was introduced into spoken Egyptian at this time. Rough and unsystematic attempts to transcribe Egyptian in the Greek alphabet were made as early as the third century B.C. It was only natural, then, that the Coptic translators of the Bible not only adopted the Greek alphabet but also generously supplemented the native lexicon with many more borrowings from Greek. The Greek vocabulary of any Coptic text is significantly large.
Evidence of dialectal differences is found as early as the third millenium B.C., but the general conservatism of the hieroglyphic script and the practice of standardizing a particular form of the language for long periods of time (e.g. Middle Egyptian, New Egyptian) tend to obscure the great dialectal diversity that must have existed in the spoken language as one traveled the 750 miles down the Nile from Aswan to the Mediterranean. The individual dialects first become recognizable when we reach the Coptic period and see the language spelled out in the Greek alphabet. The exact geographical location of the dialects is still a matter of scholarly debate, but the reader should become familiar with their names and the approximate chronological range of their use for literary purposes.
Sahidic, the dialect treated in this book, was the dialect chosen for the official translation of the Bible mentioned above. There is conflicting evidence on its geographical location: the name Sahidic, from Arabic aṣ-ṣaʿîd, Upper (i.e. Southern) Egypt, places it in the south (hence its alternate name: Theban, Thebaic); linguistic considerations, however, favor a northern locale, in the neighborhood of Memphis and the eastern Delta. One cannot rule out the possibility that both locations are correct; the fact that Thebes and Memphis alternated as the capital of Egypt through much of its history and were the chief centers of religious (priestly), building, and commercial activity could have led to the development of an "urban" dialect in these two areas, quite distinct from the dialects of the "rural" areas that lay between. By the fourth century A.D. Sahidic was firmly established as the standard literary dialect and retained this status until its demise around the tenth century. Surviving texts in Sahidic include, in addition to the New Testament and a large portion of the Old, a considerable corpus of Church literature and some remnants of secular literature, nearly all of which is translated from Greek. Of native works we have only the writings of Pachomius (c. 300), the founder of Egyptian monasticism; Shenute (c. 400), the administrator of the White Monastery in Upper Egypt; and Besa, a disciple of Shenute. The Coptic writings of Shenute, who attempted to mould the language into a literary vehicle comparable to Greek, are often referred to as the "classics" of Sahidic literature. Their syntactic complexity and unusual vocabulary usage, however, place them beyond the scope of the present work, which is based on the language of the more widely studied translation literature.
Bohairic replaced Sahidic as the standard literary dialect. Bohairic texts are attested as early as the ninth century, but the dialect does not seem to have achieved wide usage until it was adopted as the official language of the Coptic Church in the eleventh century. Most Bohairic texts come from after this time, and many of them were translated from Sahidic originals. The term Bohairic comes from Arabic al-buhairah, Lower (i.e. Northern) Egypt; it is generally assumed that Bohairic was the dialect of the Western Delta, including Alexandria and Nitria. The designation Memphitic has also been used for this dialect.
Fayyumic, as its name implies, was the dialect of northern Middle Egypt in the vicinity of the Fayyum Basin. It is well attested in texts ranging from the fourth to the eleventh century, but it apparently never attained the status of Sahidic.
Achmimic, generally located in the area of Akhmim (Panopolis) in southern Middle Egypt, enjoyed only a brief literary period from the third to the fifth century.
Subachmimic, tentatively localized between Akhmim and Thebes, was used extensively in the fourth and fifth centuries for the translation of Manichaean and Gnostic literature. Its association with this heretical material probably had much to do with its early demise as a literary dialect. The Nag Hammadi texts are in Subachmimic or a variety of Sahidic influenced by Subachmimic in varying degrees.
For further details on the dialects the reader should consult the works of Worrell, Vergote, Kahle, and Till cited in the Bibliography.
The Arab conquest of Egypt in 641 A.D. and the subsequent suppression of the native Christian population resulted in the gradual dying out of the Egyptian language in favor of Arabic. We cannot be sure how long this process took, but it is safe to assume that by the fifteenth century Coptic had ceased to be a native spoken language, thus bringing to an end a continuous written record of over four thousand years.
Sahidic Coptic is written in the Greek alphabet augmented by six letters borrowed from Demotic script, the last stage of Egyptian hieroglyphic writing. The letters of the full alphabet, together with their conventional transcription, are as follows:
The following paragraphs deal with the Coptic, not the Greek, pronunciation of this alphabet.
ⲃ was apparently pronounced like English v in voice, but it is generally read simply as b in back.
ⲅ occurs only as a positional variant of ⲕ in a very small set of forms. Pronounced like the g of good.
ⲇ and ⲍ do not normally occur in standard Sahidic spelling. ⲍ may occur for ⲥ in a few words, e.g. ⲁⲛⲍⲏⲃⲉ for ⲁⲛⲥⲏⲃⲉ school. Pronounced d as in dog and z as in zoo respectively.
ⲫ, ⲑ, and ⲭ occur in Sahidic Coptic words only as combinations of two consonants: ⲡ + ϩ, ⲧ + ϩ, and ⲕ + ϩ respectively. ⲑ is fairly frequent, e.g. ⲡⲉⲑⲟⲟⲩ evil, for ⲡⲉⲧ ϩⲟⲟⲩ. ⲫ and ⲭ are rare and need not be used at all. The Copts seem to have used this same pronunciation for these letters in Greek words, contrary to the ordinary Greek pronunciation of ⲫ as f, ⲑ as th (thin), and ⲭ as ch (German ich, ach).
ⲕ, ⲡ, and ⲧ were like English k, p, t, but without aspiration. Thus, they were more like the k, p, t of skin, spin, stop than the aspirated sounds of kin, pin, top.
ⲗ, ⲙ, and ⲛ were probably the same as English l, m, and n.
ⲝ is simply a combination of ⲕ + ⲥ, rarely used. E.g. ⲝⲟⲩⲣ ring.
ⲣ is conventionally pronounced like English r in road. Its actual pronunciation is unknown.
ⲥ was like English s in see.
ⲯ is simply ⲡ + ⲥ, rarely used. E.g. ⲯⲓⲧⲉ nine (psite).
ϣ was the sh of shall.
ϥ was the f of foot.
ϩ was probably like English h in hope.
ϫ is conventionally pronounced like the j of judge. Its actual pronunciation was probably closer to that of the [tʸ] of tune.1
ϭ, conventionally like the ch of church, was probably closer to the [kʸ] of cue, cute.
ϯ is merely a graphic symbol for ⲧ + ⲓ, but it was the normal way to spell this sequence of sounds. E.g. ϯⲙⲉ village (time).
1 Brackets are used to indicate phonetic pronunciation in standard phonetic symbols. Do not confuse these with the conventional transcriptions.
ⲁ like the a of father. E.g. ⲁϥ [af] meat.
ⲉ like the e of let. E.g. ϩⲉⲛ [hɛn] some.
ⲏ probably like the a of hate. E.g. ⲙⲏⲧ [met] ten.
ⲓ like the i of machine. This vowel is always spelled ⲉⲓ in initial positions: ⲉⲓⲛⲉ [íne] to bring, ⲉⲓⲥ [is] behold. Internally and finally the spelling alternates between ⲓ and ⲉⲓ, but ⲓ is preferred.
ⲟ like the o of log, fog, dog, off, on. E.g. ⲧⲟⲡ [tɔp] edge.
ⲩ does not appear as a simple vowel in Coptic words.
ⲟⲩ is the normal writing of the vowel [u], the oo of food. E.g. ⲛⲟⲩⲃ noub [nub] gold.
ⲱ like the o of hope. E.g. ϩⲱⲡ [hop] to hide.
The consonants y and w of English yet and wet are often referred to as semivowels because they are the same sounds as the vowels [i] and [u] of beet and boot very briefly articulated. The Coptic vowels ⲉⲓ (ⲓ) and ⲟⲩ may function as consonants in the same way. E.g. ⲉⲓⲱⲧ [yot] father, ⲟⲩⲟⲡ [wɔp] to become pure.
The semivowels ⲉⲓ (ⲓ) and ⲟⲩ combine with a preceding simple vowel to form various diphthongs. Many of the diphthongs have more than one spelling; the reader should follow the spelling used in the Lessons. The diphthongs should be pronounced carefully, with the value of the single vowel as given above plus a final y or w as the case may be.
ⲁⲓ, ⲁⲉⲓ as in ⲥⲁⲉⲓⲛ [sayn] physician, ⲁⲓⲡⲱⲧ [aypót] I ran.
ⲁⲩ (rarely ⲁⲟⲩ) as in ⲛⲁⲩ [naw] to see, ⲁⲩⲡⲱⲧ [awpót] they ran.
ⲉⲓ (less commonly ⲉⲉⲓ) as in ⲡⲉⲓⲣⲱⲙⲉ [pɛyrómɛ] this man. Although a knowledge of the grammar is necessary for making the correct distinction between ⲉⲓ = [i] and ⲉⲓ = [ɛy], the problem is not a serious one: in normal Sahidic spelling ⲉⲓ has the value ⲉ + ⲓ (1) in the demonstrative adjectives ⲡⲉⲓ- ⲧⲉⲓ- ⲛⲉⲓ- (Lesson 5), (2) in the first person verbal prefixes of the forms ⲉⲓ-, ⲛⲉⲓ-, ⲙⲉⲓ- (Lesson 21 and following), and in a few isolated words like ⲉⲓⲉ [ɛyɛ] (Lesson 29).
ⲉⲩ (rarely ⲉⲟⲩ), as in ⲉⲩϣⲁϫⲉ [ɛwšátʸɛ] while they were talking.
ⲏⲓ as in ⲡⲏⲓ [pey] the house.
ⲏⲩ (less commonly ⲏⲟⲩ) as in ⲧⲏⲩ [tew] wind.
ⲓⲉⲓ, ⲉⲓⲉⲓ is very rare and is [yi] not [iy], e.g. ϩⲓⲉⲓⲃ [hyib] lamb.
ⲓⲟⲩ is rare, e.g. ⲥⲓⲟⲩ [siw] star.
ⲟⲉⲓ, ⲟⲓ as in ⲟⲩⲟⲉⲓⲛ [wɔyn] light.
ⲟⲟⲩ as in ⲙⲟⲟⲩ [mɔw] water, ⲙⲟⲟⲩⲧ [mɔwt] dead.
ⲱⲓ as in ⲉϫⲱⲓ [ɛtʸóy] on me; rare except in final position.
ⲱⲟⲩ as in ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ [town] to stand up, ⲉϫⲱⲟⲩ [ɛtʸów] on them.
ⲟⲩⲓ (rare) as in ⲛⲟⲩⲓ [nuy] mine; also possibly as [wi] in some words, e.g. ⲕⲟⲩⲓ [kwi] small.
ⲟⲩⲟⲩ (rare) as in ⲙⲟⲩⲟⲩⲧ [muwt] to kill, ⲛⲟⲩⲟⲩ [nuw] theirs.
The double writing of any of the simple vowels is generally understood to be an indication of the presence of a glottal stop, i.e. the complete but very brief stoppage of airflow in the glottis, conventionally indicated by ʾ in transcription. Thus ⲙⲁⲁⲃ máʾăb thirty, ⲥⲉⲉⲡⲉ séʾĕpe remainder, ϣⲟⲟⲡ šóʾŏp to be. The stress is on the first vowel; the vowel after the glottal stop was probably of very brief duration.
Vowel doubling occurs in diphthongs as well, e.g. ⲙⲁⲁⲩ máʾăw mother, ⲙⲉⲉⲩⲉ méʾĕwe to think. There is no sure way of knowing whether ⲟⲟⲩ indicates [ɔw] or [ɔ́ʾɔ̆w].
One of the most distinctive features of Sahidic spelling is the short stroke placed over certain consonants or groups of consonants. This supralinear stroke, as it is called, indicates a syllable, but there is some disagreement among Coptic scholars on how this syllabification actually sounded in the spoken language. When the stroke is used over a voiced consonant such as ⲛ, it probably meant that the consonant is functioning as the vowel, i.e. the most sonorous part, of the syllable in question, exactly like the final n of English button and sudden, phonetically [-tn̥] and [-dn̥]. Thus, ϣⲛ̄ⲧ (to seek me) was pronounced [šn̥t] and ⲛ̄ⲧ (to bring me) as [n̥t]. The voiced consonants capable of having this syllabic pronunciation are ⲃ, ⲗ, ⲙ, ⲛ, and ⲣ, known mnemonically as the blemner consonants. Note that they are all voiced continuants, i.e. consonants whose voiced duration may be prolonged at will (remember that ⲃ is v, not b). E.g.
| ⲧⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | (we hear) | [tn̥sótm̥] |
| ϣⲧⲟⲣⲧⲣ̄ | (to disturb) | [štɔ́rtr̥] |
| ⲧⲃ̄ⲧ | (fish) | [tv̥t] |
| ⲕⲣⲙ̄ⲣⲙ̄ | (to mutter) | [krḿ̥rm̥] |
The stroke over the remaining consonants may be pronounced as a brief ⲉ or as ə (the first vowel of English above) before the consonant over which the stroke is placed, e.g. ⲥⲡ̄ⲥⲱⲡϥ̄ [səpsópəf] to entreat him. This pronunciation may also be used with the blemner consonants for the sake of convenience.
In non-standard texts, of which there are many, the vowel ⲉ is often written instead of using the stroke (and vice versa), but most frequently in proclitic elements and initial clusters, e.g. ⲥⲉⲡⲥⲱⲡϥ̄ = ⲥⲡ̄ⲥⲱⲡϥ̄, ϩⲉⲙ ⲡⲏⲓ = ϩⲙ̄ ⲡⲏⲓ. In standard spelling ⲉ is used regularly instead of the stroke only when the consonant preceding the consonant that would have had the stroke is a blemner; thus ⲙⲟⲕⲙⲉⲕ and ⲛⲟϭⲛⲉϭ are words of the same pattern as ⲥⲟⲡⲥⲡ̄ and ⲥⲟⲗⲥⲗ̄. This convention may have been adopted to prevent incorrect syllabification: ⲙⲟⲕⲙⲕ could be read as [mɔ́km̥k] or [mɔ́kmək]. The chief exceptions are indeed words where a different syllabification is required: ϣⲟⲙⲛ̄ⲧ [šɔ́mn̥t] three, ⲧⲱⲙⲛ̄ⲧ [tómn̥t] to befall. The ⲛ̄ of these words is an intrusive (secondary) glide from the labial ⲙ to the dental ⲧ; the earlier forms were ϣⲟⲙⲧ̄ and ⲧⲱⲙⲧ̄. The convention likewise does not apply when the final consonant is also a blemner: ⲛⲁϩⲙⲛ̄ [náhmn̥] to rescue us. Much of the variation between ⲉ and a stroke that occurs in the writing of certain verbal prefixes (e.g. ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣϥ̄-, ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥ-; ⲙⲁⲣϥ̄-, ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥ-) probably results from inconsistent application of this rule.
The forms ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ (to arise) and ⲥⲟⲟⲩⲛ̄ (to know) have been standardized in the Lessons. In the Reading Selections the orthography of the source has been followed.
Coptic is a highly compounding language, mostly by prefixation. All prefixal elements are proclitic, i.e. unstressed and bound, to the word which stands last in the sequence, regardless of its length, e.g.
ϩⲛ̄ ⲧⲉϥⲙⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲧⲧⲁⲕⲟ = ϩⲛ̄-ⲧⲉ-ϥ-ⲙⲛ̄ⲧ-ⲁⲧ-ⲧⲁⲕⲟ́
in his imperishability
Any element designated as prefixal in the course of the Lessons should be considered as proclitic. All simple prepositions are proclitic, like ϩⲛ̄ in the above example, but for the sake of clarity they are written as separate words in this text.
The main stress, then, is on the word standing at the end of the compound. The successive application of the following rules will enable the reader to apply the correct stress in all but the rarest cases:
Assimilation, for our present purposes, may be defined briefly as the alteration of a sound due to its proximity to another sound, usually resulting in greater phonetic compatibility. The final ⲛ̄ of prefixal elements (e.g. prepositions, particles, articles) is regularly assimilated to ⲙ̄ before ⲡ and ⲙ, e.g.
*ϩⲛ̄ ⲡⲏⲓ → ϩⲙ̄ ⲡⲏⲓ
in the house
*ⲛ̄ⲙⲁⲉⲓⲛ → ⲙ̄ⲙⲁⲉⲓⲛ
the signs
The assimilation of consonant -ⲛ also occurs but is not standard, e.g. ⲧⲉⲙⲡⲓⲥⲧⲓⲥ for ⲧⲉⲛⲡⲓⲥⲧⲓⲥ (our faith). In some texts the particle ⲛ̄, which has several grammatical functions, assimilates completely to ⲃ, ⲗ, and ⲣ, e.g. ⲛ̄ⲃⲣ̄ⲣⲉ → ⲃ̄ⲃⲣ̄ⲣⲉ (the young), ⲛ̄ⲣⲱⲙⲉ → ⲣ̄ⲣⲱⲙⲉ (the men). This is not considered standard, but it is not uncommon; numerous examples will be met in our reading selection from the Wisdom of Solomon.
Whatever the pronunciation of the supralinear stroke was, an alternate spelling with -ⲁ- often occurs before final -ϩ: ⲱⲛⲁϩ = ⲱⲛϩ̄ to live. This represents an assimilation to the guttural quality of ϩ.
An alternation between -ⲱ- and -ⲟⲩ- in certain word patterns is a result of an assimilation in the pre-Coptic stage. ⲱ was altered to ⲟⲩ after ⲙ and ⲛ; thus, words like ⲙⲟⲩϩ, ⲛⲟⲩϫⲉ, ⲙⲟⲩⲟⲩⲧ, and ⲛⲟⲩⲕ originally had the same vowel as ⲕⲱⲧ, ⲕⲱⲧⲉ, ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ, and ⲧⲱⲕ respectively.
Greek words in Coptic are usually spelled correctly. Certain types of errors do occasionally occur, however, resulting in part from the discrepancy between the classical spelling and the contemporary pronunciation, and they must be taken into account when consulting a standard Greek dictionary. The most frequent of these are confusions between (1) ⲏ and ⲩ; (2) ⲉ and ⲁⲓ; (3) ⲓ and ⲏ; (4) ⲟ and ⲱ; (5) ⲅ and ⲕ; (6) ⲓ and ⲉⲓ; (7) ⲏ and ⲉ; (8) ⲧ and ⲇ; (9) initial ϩ and zero. All of these are illustrated by the following words chosen from our Reading Selections.
1.1 Gender. There are two grammatical genders in Coptic: masculine and feminine. Nouns denoting male beings are usually masculine; those denoting females, feminine. The gender of other nouns cannot, in general, be deduced either from their form or meaning and must be learned for each noun. Examples:
| masculine | feminine | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲓⲱⲧ | father | ⲙⲁⲩ | mother |
| ⲕⲁϩⲓ | earth, ground | ⲫⲉ | sky, heaven |
| ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ | day | ⲉϫⲱⲣϩ | night |
There are some pairs of nouns where a formal relationship exists between the masculine and the feminine form:
| masculine | feminine | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲥⲟⲛ | brother | ⲥⲱⲛⲓ | sister |
| ϣⲏⲣⲓ | boy, son | ϣⲉⲣⲓ | girl, daughter |
| ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ | old man | ϧⲉⲗⲗⲱ | old woman |
These will be noted in the lesson vocabularies. The derivational process involved is no longer a productive one in Coptic: such pairs cannot be formed at will.
1.2 Number: singular and plural. Only a relatively small number of nouns have preserved a distinct plural form. For example:
| singular | plural | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲓⲱⲧ | father | ⲓⲟϯ | fathers |
| ⲥⲟⲛ | brother | ⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | brothers |
| ϫⲟⲓ | ship | ⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ | ships |
The plural is otherwise made explicit by the form of the article (see below), the noun itself remaining unchanged. Those plurals that are in common use will be given in the lesson vocabularies along with the singular. They should be learned as they occur, since there is no consistent pattern for their formation.
1.3 The definite article. The definite article has the forms
| masc. sing. | ⲡ ⲡⲓ, ⲫ |
| fem. sing. | ⲧ ϯ, ⲑ |
| common plural | ⲛ ⲛⲓ, ⲛ |
These are attached directly to the noun, as in
| ⲣⲱⲙⲓ | man | ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ | the man | ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ | the men |
| ϫⲓϫ | hand | ⲧϫⲓϫ | the hand | ⲛϫⲓϫ | the hands |
The plural article appears as ⲙ before ⲡ and ⲙ (cf. Intro., p. xvi):
| ⲫⲉ | sky | ⲧⲫⲉ | the sky | ⲙⲫⲏⲟⲩⲓ | the heavens |
| ⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ | sign | ⲡⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ | the sign | ⲙⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ | the signs |
Before nouns beginning with a vowel the plural article appears as either ⲛ or ⲛ:
| ⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ | ships | ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ or ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ | the ships |
Before initial stroked consonants there are several possibilities:
| ⲙⲧⲟⲛ, ⲉⲙⲧⲟⲛ | repose | ⲡⲉⲙⲧⲟⲛ, ⲡⲙⲧⲟⲛ, ⲡⲉⲙⲧⲟⲛ | the repose |
| ⲛⲭⲁⲓ, ⲉⲛⲭⲁⲓ | thing | ⲛⲉⲛⲭⲁⲓ, ⲛⲛⲭⲁⲓ, ⲛⲛⲭⲁⲓ | the things |
The fuller forms ⲡⲉ-, ⲧⲉ-, ⲛⲉ- are used regularly before nouns beginning with two consonants:
| ⲭⲗⲟⲙ | crown | ⲡⲭⲗⲟⲙ | the crown | ⲛⲭⲗⲟⲙ | the crowns |
| ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ | woman | ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ | the woman | ⲛϩⲓⲟⲙⲓ | the women |
Note that ⲟⲩ and (ⲉ)ⲓ have a consonantal value (w and y respectively) in certain initial situations:
| ⲟⲩϩⲟⲣ | dog | ⲡⲟⲩϩⲟⲣ | the dog (pewhor) | ⲛⲟⲩϩⲱⲣ | the dogs |
| ⲙⲱⲓⲧ | road | ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ | the road (tehyē) | ⲛⲙⲓⲧⲱⲟⲩⲓ | the roads |
The fuller forms are also used with certain nouns denoting periods of time:
| ⲡⲥⲏⲟⲩ | the time |
| ⲡⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ | the day |
| ϯⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ | the hour (ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ) |
| ⲧⲉⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ | the year |
| ⲡⲉϫⲱⲣϩ | the night (ⲉϫⲱⲣϩ) |
Note that ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ and ⲉϫⲱⲣϩ fall under the two-consonant rule above.
1.4 Prepositions. Coptic prepositions are proclitic (i.e. unstressed and bound) to the word they govern. In many texts some or all of the prepositions are printed as a unit with the following word: ϩⲓⲡϫⲟⲓ on the ship, ⲉⲡⲏⲓ to the house. In this text, however, all prepositions will be printed as separate words: ϩⲓ ⲡϫⲟⲓ, ⲉ ⲡⲏⲓ. An exception will be made only in the case of the preposition ⲉ (to, for) if it is ligatured orthographically to a following ⲟⲩ- as ⲉⲩ-.
The preposition ⲛⲉⲙ (with) is used as the conjunction "and" in joining two nouns:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ϯⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| the man and the woman |
A definite noun followed by a prepositional phrase or local adverb (e.g. ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ there) constitutes a full predication (sentence) in Coptic:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡϫⲟⲓ. | The man is on the ship. |
| ϯⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ. | The woman is in the house. |
| ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. | The ships are there. |
In sentences of this type there is no overt equivalent of English "is/are". We shall refer to sentences of this type as sentences with adverbial predicates.
In the lesson vocabularies all nouns will be given with the definite article, separated from the noun by a period. This device makes both the gender of the noun and the correct form of the article clear at a glance. To save space, the article is not included in the definition. Prepositions and particles which regularly have assimilation of final ⲛ̄ to ⲙ̄ before ⲡ and ⲙ will be noted, as e.g. ϩⲛ̄ (ϩⲙ̄).
2.1 The indefinite article. The indefinite article for nouns of either gender is ⲟⲩ in the singular, ϩⲁⲛ in the plural, prefixed directly to the noun:
| ⲟⲩϫⲟⲓ | a ship | ϩⲁⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ | ships, some ships |
| ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ | a man | ϩⲁⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ | men, some men |
| ⲟⲩⲙⲱⲓⲧ | a road | ϩⲁⲛⲙⲓⲧⲱⲟⲩⲓ | roads, some roads |
The plural indefinite article may be translated as "some, certain" or be omitted entirely in translation, as the context requires. The plural indefinite article is frequently written as ϧⲉⲛ and is easily confused with the preposition ϧⲉⲛ. In the exercises to the lessons we shall always distinguish between the two, but in part of the Reading Selections the orthography of the source is maintained.
Because the use of the Coptic articles, both definite and indefinite, corresponds closely to the use of the articles in English, only exceptions to this general correspondence will be noted in the following lessons when appropriate. References to the omission of the article require special attention. For the present lesson note that indefinite nouns designating unspecific quantities of a substance require an indefinite article in Coptic where there is none in English:
| ⲟⲩⲙⲱⲟⲩ | water | ϩⲁⲛⲱⲓⲕ | bread | ϩⲁⲛⲁϥ | meat |
The choice between the singular and plural article here is lexical, i.e. it depends on the particular noun. All such nouns, if definite and specific, may of course appear with the definite article: ⲡⲙⲱⲟⲩ, ⲡⲱⲓⲕ, ⲡⲁϥ. Abstract nouns, such as ⲙⲏⲓ truth, often appear with either article (ⲟⲩⲙⲏⲓ, ⲧⲙⲏⲓ) where English employs no article.
2.2 Indefinite nouns cannot be used as subjects of sentences with adverbial predicates unless introduced by the word ⲟⲩⲟⲛ or its negative:
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ. |
| A monk is on the road. |
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ is actually a predicator of existence ("there is, there are"), and the sentence given may also be translated as "There is a monk on the road.".
The negative of ⲟⲩⲟⲛ is ⲙⲙⲟⲛ (also spelled ⲙⲙⲟⲛ). In general, an indefinite article is deleted (omitted) in negation in Coptic:
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ. |
| There is no monk on the road. |
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ. |
| There is no man in the house. |
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ and ⲙⲙⲟⲛ are not used before definite nouns.
The sentence ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ is negated by adding ⲁⲛ:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ. |
| The man is not in the house. |
2.3 The genitive (or possessive) relationship between two nouns is expressed by the preposition ⲛ̀ (of):
| ⲡⲏⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the house of the man |
| the man's house |
| ⲧϣⲉⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| the woman's daughter |
If the first noun is indefinite, however, the preposition ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ is used instead of ⲛ̀:
| ⲟⲩϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ |
| a book of the monk |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ |
| a servant of the king |
3.1 Relative clauses. As we shall see in subsequent lessons, relative clauses in Coptic exhibit a variety of forms, depending on the type of predication involved. In the present lesson we shall consider only those relative clauses associated with sentences with adverbial predicates. Note the transformation
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ. |
| The man is in the house. |
| → |
| (ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ) ⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ |
| (the man) who is in the house |
The relative pronoun ⲉⲧ functions here as the subject of the relative clause; it is not inflected for number or gender:
| ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ |
| the woman who is on the road |
| ⲛϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲑⲉⲛⲉⲉⲧⲉ |
| the monks who are in the monastery |
Negation is with ⲁⲛ:
| ⲛ̀ϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲑⲉⲛⲉⲉⲧⲉ ⲁⲛ. |
Relative clauses cannot be used to modify an indefinite noun. This is an important general rule of Coptic.
Any relative clause may be substantivized, i.e. converted to the status of a noun, by prefixing the appropriate form of the definite article:
| ⲡⲉⲧ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ |
| the one who (he who, that which) is in the house |
| ⲧⲉⲧ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ |
| the one (f.) who is with the boy |
| ⲛⲉⲧ ϩⲓ ⲡϫⲟⲓ |
| those who (those things which) are on the ship |
Such constructions may refer to persons or things, depending on the context.
The relative clause ⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ, who (which) is there, is used to express the further demonstrative "that":
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ |
| that man |
| ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ |
| those ships |
3.2 Greek nouns. The typical Coptic text contains a large number of Greek loanwords. Greek masculine and feminine nouns retain their gender; Greek neuter nouns are treated as masculine:
| ὁ ἄγγελος | ⲡⲁⲅⲅⲉⲗⲟⲥ | the angel |
| ἡ ἐπιστολή | ⲧⲉⲡⲓⲥⲧⲟⲗⲏ | the letter |
| ἡ ψυχή | ⲧⲯⲩⲭⲏ | the soul |
| τὸ πνεῦμα | ⲡⲡⲛⲉⲩⲙⲁ | the spirit |
| τὸ δῶρον | ⲡⲇⲱⲣⲟⲛ | the gift |
Greek nouns appear in the nominative singular form of Greek and are usually not inflected in any way. Occasionally, however, a Coptic plural ending is added to a Greek noun:
| ⲛⲉⲡⲓⲥⲧⲟⲗⲟⲟⲩⲉ |
| the letters |
| ⲛⲯⲩⲭⲟⲟⲩⲉ |
| the souls |
The Greek noun ἡ θάλασσα (the sea) was borrowed as ⲧ.ϩⲁⲗⲁⲥⲥⲁ, i.e. ⲑ was taken as the definite article plus ϩ. Thus, "a sea" is ⲟⲩϩⲁⲗⲁⲥⲥⲁ.
Initial χ, φ, θ, ψ, ξ of Greek nouns are considered two consonants in attaching the definite article (cf. Intro., p. x).
| ⲧ.ⲭⲱⲣⲁ |
| the country |
| ⲡ.ⲫⲓⲗⲟⲥⲟⲫⲟⲥ |
| the philosopher |
| ⲧ.ⲯⲩⲭⲏ |
| the soul |
| ⲧ.ⲑⲩⲥⲓⲁ |
| the offering |
4.1 Pronominal possession is indicated by inserting a bound form of the appropriate pronoun between the definite article and the noun so modified. It is best to learn the forms, i.e. the article plus the pronoun, as a unit:
| masc. sing. noun | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| sg. | 1 com. | ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ | my father |
| 2 masc. | ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ | your father | |
| 2 fem. | ⲡⲉⲓⲱⲧ | your father | |
| 3 masc. | ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ | his father | |
| 3 fem. | ⲡⲉⲥⲓⲱⲧ | her father | |
| pl. | 1 com. | ⲡⲉⲛⲓⲱⲧ | our father |
| 2 com. | ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛⲓⲱⲧ | your father | |
| 3 com. | ⲡⲟⲩⲓⲱⲧ | their father | |
| fem. sing. noun | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| sg. | 1 com. | ⲧⲁⲙⲁⲩ | my mother |
| 2 masc. | ⲧⲉⲕⲙⲁⲩ | your mother | |
| 2 fem. | ⲧⲉⲙⲁⲩ | your mother | |
| 3 masc. | ⲧⲉϥⲙⲁⲩ | his mother | |
| 3 fem. | ⲧⲉⲥⲙⲁⲩ | her mother | |
| pl. | 1 com. | ⲧⲉⲛⲙⲁⲩ | our mother |
| 2 com. | ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲙⲁⲩ | your mother | |
| 3 com. | ⲧⲟⲩⲙⲁⲩ | their mother | |
| plural noun (my brothers, etc.) | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| sg. | 1 com. | ⲛⲁⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | |
| 2 masc. | ⲛⲉⲕⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| 2 fem. | ⲛⲉⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| 3 masc. | ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| 3 fem. | ⲛⲉⲥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| pl. | 1 com. | ⲛⲉⲛⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | |
| 2 com. | ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
| 3 com. | ⲛⲟⲩⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | ||
Note that there is a gender distinction in the second and third persons of the singular but not of the plural. This is characteristic of all pronominal paradigms in Coptic. The term "common" (com.) refers to forms or categories where no gender distinction is made.
4.2 The nearer demonstrative "this" is expressed by the forms
| masc. sing. | ⲡⲁⲓ- |
| fem. sing. | ⲧⲁⲓ- |
| com. pl. | ⲛⲁⲓ- |
prefixed directly to the noun:
| ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ | this man |
| ⲧⲁⲓⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ | this woman |
| ⲛⲁⲓⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ | these brothers |
After a noun with a demonstrative adjective the genitive is usually expressed by ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, as in
| ⲡⲁⲓϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲁⲥⲟⲛ |
| this book of my brother('s) |
4.3 The pronominal element -ⲕⲉ- inserted between the article and the noun expresses "other":
| ⲡⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ | the other man |
| ⲛⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ | the other men |
The indefinite article is omitted in the singular but not in the plural:
| ⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ | another man |
| ϩⲁⲛⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ | (some) other men |
-ⲕⲉ- may also be used after demonstrative or possessive prefixes:
| ⲡⲁⲓⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| this other man |
| ⲡⲁⲕⲉϫⲟⲓ |
| my other ship |
-ⲕⲉ- is not inflected for number or gender in this usage.
5.1 Sentences with nominal predicates. A second type of non-verbal sentence is illustrated by
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ. |
| He (It) is my father. |
| ⲧⲁⲙⲁⲩ ⲧⲉ. |
| She (It) is my mother. |
| ⲛⲁⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are (It is) my brothers. |
| ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲡⲉ. |
| He (It) is a man. |
| ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲧⲉ. |
| She (It) is a woman. |
| ϩⲁⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are (It is) ships. |
The pronominal subject is expressed by ⲡⲉ (m.s.), ⲧⲉ (f.s.), and ⲛⲉ (pl.), the choice of which depends usually on the gender and number of the predicate noun. Simple two-member sentences like the above are relatively rare except in response to such questions as "Who is that?" "What are these?" where an answer giving the predicate alone is sufficient, the subject being understood from the context. Modifiers of the predicate, such as a genitive phrase, may optionally stand after the pronominal subject.
| ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲟⲩⲏⲃ. |
| He is the son of the priest. |
A nominal subject may be added to the basic predication, producing a three-member sentence in which ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ are reduced virtually to the status of a copula. If the predicate is indefinite, the order is almost always predicate + ⲡⲉ, the subject being placed before or after the whole unit:
| ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ. |
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ. |
| My father is a teacher. |
If the subject and predicate are both definite, the normal position of ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ is between them:
| ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲁϧ. |
| This man is our teacher. |
Identification of subject and predicate in this case can be made only on a contextual basis. The rarer order, ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ, places as emphasis on the real subject: "As for this man, he is our teacher."
In the event that there is a disagreement in the number or gender of subject and predicate, the copula ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ usually assumes the number and gender of the noun immediately preceding it.
All of the preceding sentences are negated by placing ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀) before the predicate and ⲁⲛ before the ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ:
| ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ. |
| It is not my father. |
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ. |
| My father is not a teacher. |
| ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ. |
| This man is not our teacher. |
Note that in the case where both subject and predicate are definite, the nominal element negated is, by definition, the predicate.
Sentences with nominal predicates are converted to the status of relative clauses with ⲉⲧⲉ. For the moment we shall restrict ourselves to those clauses where ⲉⲧⲉ functions as the subject of the relative clause:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ |
| the man who is a teacher |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ |
| the man who is not a teacher |
The phrase ⲉⲧⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ is frequently used to introduce explanatory material, much like English "namely, i.e., that is to say":
| ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲏⲣ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲓ̄ⲥ̄ ⲡⲉⲭ̄ⲥ̄ |
| our savior, i.e. Jesus Christ |
5.2 The nearer demonstrative pronouns (this, these) are ⲫⲁⲓ (m.s.), ⲑⲁⲓ (f.s.), and ⲛⲁⲓ (pl.). They are frequently employed as subjects in sentences with nominal predicates:
| ⲛⲁⲓ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| These are his words. |
| ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁϫⲟⲓ. |
| This is my ship. |
| ⲑⲁⲓ ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕⲓ ⲧⲉ. |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕⲓ ⲧⲉ ⲑⲁⲓ. |
| This is a maidservant. |
6.1 The independent personal pronouns.
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ | I |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ | you (m.s.) |
| ⲛⲑⲟ | you (f.s.) |
| ⲛⲑⲟϥ | he, it (m.) |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲥ | she, it (f.) |
| ⲁⲛⲟⲛ | we |
| ⲛⲑⲱⲧⲉⲛ | you (c.pl.) |
| ⲛⲑⲱⲟⲩ | they (c.pl.) |
These pronouns occur frequently in sentences with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ. When used as predicates in a two-member sentence, they are invariably followed by ⲡⲉ:
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ. | It is I. |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ. | It is she. |
| ⲁⲛⲟⲛ ⲡⲉ. | It is we. |
In three-member sentences they may appear in ordinary subject or predicate positions:
| ⲛⲑⲟϥ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲭ̄ⲥ̄. |
| He is the Christ. |
| ⲛⲑⲟϥ ⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲡⲉ. |
| He is a god. |
| ⲛⲉϥⲉⲃⲓⲁⲓⲕ ⲛⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲛ. |
| We are his servants. |
In sentences with an indefinite nominal predicate a special construction without ⲡⲉ is used with the pronouns of the 1st and 2nd person; negation is with ⲁⲛ alone:
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩϩⲁⲙϣⲉ (ⲁⲛ). |
| I am (not) a carpenter. |
| ⲁⲛⲟⲛ ϩⲁⲛⲟⲩⲏⲃ. |
| We are priests. |
In this construction a reduced proclitic form of the pronoun is very often used:
| ⲁⲛⲅ̄- | I |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲕ̄- | you (m.s.) |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉ- | you (f.s.) |
| ⲁⲛ- | we |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲧⲛ̄- | you (c.pl.) |
as in
| ⲁⲛⲅ̄-ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲅⲉⲗⲟⲥ (ⲁⲛ). |
| I am (not) an angel. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲕ̄-ⲟⲩϩⲁⲙϣⲉ. |
| You are a carpenter. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲧⲛ̄-ϩⲉⲛⲙⲁⲑⲏⲧⲏⲥ. |
| You are pupils. |
A 3rd person masc. form ⲛ̄ⲧϥ̄- also occurs, but is very rare. The reduced forms of the 1st and 2nd person pronouns may also be used with a definite predicate, but this construction is rather infrequent:
| ⲁⲛⲅ̄-ⲑⲙ̄ϩⲁⲗ ⲙ̄ ⲡϫⲟⲉⲓⲥ. |
| I am the handmaiden of the Lord. |
6.2 The interrogative pronouns.
| ⲛⲓⲙ | who? |
| ⲁϣ | what? |
| ⲟⲩ | what? |
These pronouns are used in sentences with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ:
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉ? |
| Who is it? |
| ⲁϣ ⲡⲉ? |
| What is it? |
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ? |
| Who is this man? |
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲣⲁⲛ? |
| What is your name? (note idiom) |
| ⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ? |
| What is this? |
| ⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ? |
| What are these? |
The interrogative pronoun normally stands first. The choice of number and gender for the copula depends on the understood or expressed subject. The pronoun ⲟⲩ is also found with the indefinite article:
| ⲟⲩⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ? |
| What is it? (lit.: It is a what?) |
| ϩⲁⲛⲟⲩ ⲛⲉ? |
| What are they? (lit.: They are whats?) |
When the subject is a personal pronoun of the 1st or 2nd person, it may be placed before ⲛⲓⲙ or ⲟⲩ:
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| Who are you? |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲟⲩⲟⲩ? |
| What are you? |
The personal pronoun may be repeated for emphasis:
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲛⲓⲙ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ? |
| Who am I? |
Note that ⲛⲓⲙ may also be used in ordinary genitive constructions:
| ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| Whose son? |
7.1 The First Perfect. Verbal inflection in Coptic is commonly, but not solely, of the form: verbal prefix + subject (noun/pronoun) + verb. The infinitive is the main lexical form of the verb and may occur in all of the verbal conjugations. Its uses and further modifications will be dealt with in subsequent lessons. The conjugation known as the First Perfect is the narrative past tense par excellence and corresponds to the English preterite (simple past: I wrote, I wept, I sat down) or, if the context demands, the English perfect (I have written):
| ⲁⲓϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ | I went |
| ⲁⲕϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ | you (m.s.) went |
| ⲁⲣⲉϣⲉ ⲛⲉ | you (f.s.) went |
| ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ | he went |
| ⲁⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲥ | she went |
| ⲁⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ | we went |
| ⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ | you (c.pl.) went |
| ⲁⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ | they went |
The pronominal elements are for the most part familiar from the possessive prefixes of Lesson 4. In the 1st person singular ⲓ is normal for most of the verbal system (contrast the -ⲁ- of ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ). The pronominal element of the 2nd person feminine exhibits much variation and should be noted carefully for each conjugation introduced: ⲁⲣⲉⲃⲱⲕ and ⲁⲃⲱⲕ are also attested in the First Perfect.
If the subject is nominal, the verbal prefix is ⲁ-:
| ⲁ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the man went |
There are two other ways in which nominal subjects may be used in a verbal phrase: (1) they may stand before the verbal unit, which in the First Perfect still requires a pronoun as well:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the man went |
| ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲥ |
| the woman went |
or (2) they may stand after the verbal unit, again with a pronominal subject, introduced by the element ⲛ̀ϫⲉ:
| ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the man went |
| ⲁⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| the woman went |
All three constructions are common and differ only in the emphasis accorded the subject. When the verbal prefix is followed by the indefinite article, the resulting ⲁ-ⲟⲩ… may be spelled ⲁⲩ…, as in
| ⲁ-ⲟⲩϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| ⲁⲩϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| a monk went |
7.2 The prepositions ⲉ, ϣⲁ, ⲉϫⲉⲛ are frequent after verbs of motion.
ⲉ indicates motion to or toward a place or person, less commonly motion onto or into:
| ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉ ⲡⲭⲣⲟ. |
| He went to the shore. |
| ⲁⲩⲫⲱⲧ ⲉ ⲧⲉⲕⲕⲗⲏⲥⲓⲁ. |
| They ran to the church. |
| ⲁⲩⲁⲗⲏⲓ ⲉ ⲡϫⲟⲓ. |
| They got on (or into) the ship. |
Otherwise the preposition ⲉ is very frequent in a general referential sense: "to, for, in regard to," with many other nuances that will be noted in passing.
ϣⲁ indicates motion to, up to; it is used more frequently with persons than places:
| ⲁϥⲫⲱⲧ ϣⲁ ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ. |
| He ran to his father. |
| ⲁⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ϣⲁ ⲡⲉⲡⲓⲥⲕⲟⲡⲟⲥ. |
| We went to the bishop. |
ⲉϫⲉⲛ indicates motion onto, on:
| ⲁϥⲁⲗⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲱ. |
| He got on the donkey. |
| ⲁⲥϩⲉⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ. |
| She fell on the ground. |
ⲉϫⲉⲛ properly denotes motion onto, while ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ denotes static location; the two are sometimes interchanged. The same contrast exists with the less frequent pair ϩⲓⲣⲉⲛ (at the entrance of) and ⲉⲣⲉⲛ (to the entrance of).
Several of the prepositions we have already introduced also occur freely with verbs of motion. For example ϩⲓ, ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ (on or along a surface), ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ (behind, after), ⲛⲉⲙ (along with), ϧⲉⲛ (within a circumscribed area), ⲛ̀ⲛⲁϩⲣⲉⲛ (into the presence of), ϩⲁϩⲧⲉⲛ (up to, near). The preposition ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ often has the sense of English "after" in "to go after," i.e. to go to fetch, or "to run after," i.e. to try to overtake. The reader should give particular attention to the use of prepositions with verbs, since these combinations are sometimes quite idiomatic and unpredictable.
8.1 Directional adverbs. Coptic possesses a set of directional adverbs which correspond very closely to English adverbs of the type "up, down, in, out, over, along, etc." As with their English counterparts, the directional meanings found with verbs of motion are for all practical purposes the basic meanings (e.g. to go up, to sink down, to run in), but extended uses are equally common (e.g. to shut up, to quiet down, to think over). The Coptic directional adverbs consist formally of the preposition ⲉ plus a noun, with or without the definite article. Most of the nouns in question are seldom met outside of these particular expressions and will be considered in more detail in a later lesson. Because these adverbs are so frequent, we shall follow the practice of other editors and write them as single units. The following eight are the most important:
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ | out, away |
| ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ | in |
| ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ | up |
| ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ | down |
| ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ | down |
| ⲉⲧϩⲏ | forward, ahead |
| ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ | back, rearward |
| ⲉⲧⲡⲉ | upward |
| ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ | upward |
The adverbs may be used alone, as in
| ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. | He went away. |
| ⲁϥⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ. | He came in. |
| ⲁϥⲫⲱⲧ ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ. | He ran back. |
But they very frequently combine with a simple preposition to form a compound prepositional phrase. Among the most frequent of these are
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉ | out to, away to |
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ | out of, out from in, away from; (rarely) out into |
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ | same as preceding |
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓ | away from on, out from on, away from at |
| ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ | (1) away from (a person); (2) through, out through (a place); (3) through the agency of (a person or thing) |
| ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲉ | to, into, toward |
| ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉ | up to |
| ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ ⲉ | down to |
| ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ | up onto |
| ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲉⲛ | down upon |
| ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ ⲉ | down to, down into, down onto, down on |
| ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ ⲉϫⲉⲛ | down onto, down on |
| ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ ⲉ | back to |
| ⲉⲧϩⲏ ⲉ | ahead to, forward to |
The meaning of most such compounds when used with verbs of motion is generally self-evident, but caution is in order when dealing with their use with other verbs. The dictionary should always be consulted to check on idiomatic and unpredictable meanings.
8.2 Clauses containing a First Perfect may be coordinated with the conjunction ⲟⲩⲟϩ (and) or follow one another with no conjunction (termed "asyndeton"):
| ⲁϥϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| ⲁϥϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ, ⲁϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He sat down and wept. |
8.3 Many infinitives are used as masculine singular nouns. This usage will be noted without further comment in the lesson vocabularies from now on ("as n.m.:"). For the infinitives in Vocabulary 7 note the nouns ⲡ.ϣⲗⲏⲗ prayer, ⲡ.ⲫⲱⲧ flight, and ⲡ.ⲣⲓⲙⲓ weeping.
Note: Only the less predictable combinations of verb and prepositional phrase will be given in the lesson vocabularies. Other combinations in the exercises should be self-evident from the meanings of the individual words involved.
9.1 Prepositions with pronominal suffixes. A pronominal object of a preposition is expressed by means of a suffixed form of the pronoun. The preposition itself assumes a prepronominal form which must be learned with each preposition. For example, the preposition ⲉ becomes ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ before pronominal suffixes. The mark ⸗ is a convention used in Coptic grammars to indicate any form to which a pronominal suffix is to be added. The prepronominal forms of the prepositions introduced thus far are as follows:
| ⲛ̀ | ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ |
| ϧⲉⲛ | ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ⸗ |
| ϧⲁ | ϧⲁⲣⲟ⸗ |
| ϩⲓ | ϩⲓⲱ(ⲱ)⸗ |
| ⲛⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉⲙⲁ⸗ |
| ϣⲁ | ϣⲁⲣⲟ⸗ |
| ⲉ | ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ |
| ϩⲓϫⲉⲛ | ϩⲓϫⲱ⸗ |
| ⲉϫⲉⲛ | ⲉϫⲱ⸗ |
| ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ | ϩⲓⲧⲟⲟⲧ⸗ |
| ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ | ⲛ̀ⲥⲱ⸗ |
| ϩⲓⲣⲉⲛ | ϩⲓⲣⲱ⸗ |
| ⲉⲣⲉⲛ | ⲉⲣⲱ⸗ |
| ⲛⲁϩⲣⲉⲛ | ⲛⲁϩⲣⲁ⸗ |
| ϩⲁϩⲧⲉⲛ | ϩⲁϩⲧⲏ⸗ |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲉ | ⲟⲩⲃⲏ⸗ |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲉ | ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲏⲧ⸗ |
Because the variety exhibited by the prepronominal forms is at first puzzling, the following comments may be of some help:
The nouns contained in these expressions will be dealt with in a later lesson.
Typical inflections of these prepositions are as follows:
| ⲉⲣⲟⲓ | to me |
| ⲉⲣⲟⲕ | to you (m.s.) |
| ⲉⲣⲟ | to you (f.s.) |
| ⲉⲣⲟϥ | to him |
| ⲉⲣⲟⲥ | to her |
| ⲉⲣⲟⲛ | to us |
| ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ | to you (pl.) |
| ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ | to them |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲏⲓ | with me |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲕ | etc. |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲉ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲥ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲛ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| ⲛϧⲏⲧ | in me |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲕ | etc. |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏϯ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧϥ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲥ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲟⲩ |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲓ | against me |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲕ | etc. |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏϥ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲥ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲛ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲉ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲏⲟⲩ |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧ | because of me |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲕ | etc. |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏϯ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧϥ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲥ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲉ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲟⲩ |
The prepronominal form of ϩⲓ appears as ϩⲓⲱⲧ⸗; typical forms are
| ϩⲓⲱⲧ | on me |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧⲕ | etc. |
| ϩⲓⲱϯ | |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧϥ | |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧⲥ | |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ϩⲓ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ | |
| ϩⲓⲱⲧⲟⲩ |
The following details on the forms of suffixed pronouns in general should be noted for future reference:
Translate the following prepositional phrases. Replace the nominal object with the appropriate pronominal suffix. E.g. ⲉⲧⲃⲉ ⲡⲉⲓϩⲱⲃ → ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧϥ.
10.1 The Direct Object. The direct object of a transitive verb is usually introduced with the preposition ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀, ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗):
| ⲁϥⲕⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲏⲓ. |
| He built a house. |
| ⲁϥⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ. |
| He built it. |
Many verbs, especially those denoting perception, employ ⲉ:
| ⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϧⲣⲱⲟⲩ. |
| We heard his voice. |
| ⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟϥ. |
| We heard it. |
Occasionally other prepositions assume this function, as for example ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ in
| ⲁϥϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲧⲉϥⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He looked for his wife. |
| ⲁϥϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲥ. |
| He looked for her. |
The appropriate preposition for each transitive verb will be given in the lesson vocabularies when a verb is introduced.
10.2 The Indirect Object (Dative). An indirect object, if present, is introduced with the preposition ⲛ̀ (ⲛⲁ⸗, inflected like ⲛⲉⲙⲁ⸗ in §9.1):
| ⲁⲓϯ ⲙ̀ ⲡϫⲱⲙ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ. |
| I gave the book to the man. |
| ⲁⲓϯ ⲛⲁϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡϫⲱⲙ. |
| I gave him the book. |
| ⲁⲓϯ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲛⲁϥ. |
| I gave it to him. |
It is unfortunate that the prenominal forms of the most frequent direct and indirect object markers are the same (ⲛ̀, ⲙ̀ before ⲡ and ⲙ). In general the direct object precedes the indirect object unless the direct object is nominal and the indirect object is pronominal. In the latter case either order is correct, but there is a preference for placing the indirect object first. The preposition ⲉ (ⲉⲣⲟ⸗) also often marks what Greek and English regard as an indirect object (dative).
10.3 The Negative of the First Perfect. The negative forms of the First Perfect are not formally related to the positive forms:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ | I did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ | you (m.s.) did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϣⲉ ⲛⲉ | you (f.s.) did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ | he did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲥ | she did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ | we did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ | you (pl.) did not go |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲟⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ | they did not go |
With a nominal subject: ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ the man did not go.
Variant spellings such as ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕ-, ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥ-, and ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛ- are not uncommon.
10.4 As noted in Lesson 9, many prepositions consist of a simple preposition compounded with a noun. The nouns occurring in these expressions belong to a special group which take pronominal suffixes to indicate possession. We shall deal with the more important of these individually in later lessons, but for the moment note ⲧⲟⲧ⸗, the pre-suffixal form of ⲧⲱⲣⲓ (hand). The absolute form ⲧⲱⲣⲓ survives only in the special meanings "handle, tool, spade" and in some compound verbal expressions (see Glossary); in the sense of "hand" it has been replaced by ϫⲓϫ. Prepositions compounded with ⲧⲟⲧ⸗, such as ϩⲓⲧⲟⲧ⸗, ⲉⲧⲟⲧ⸗, ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧ⸗, often employ a construction with an anticipatory pronominal object before the real nominal object, the latter being introduced by the particle ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀):
| ϩⲓⲧⲟⲧϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ |
| by (through the agency of) the king |
| ⲉⲧⲟⲧⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ |
| to (into the hands of) his brothers |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧⲥ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲉϥⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| from (from the hand of) his wife |
This same construction is also occasionally found with the other prepositions introduced thus far.
11.1 The Forms of the Infinitive. The nominal or pronominal object of many transitive verbs may be suffixed directly to the infinitive without the use of a prepositional object marker, as in
| ⲁⲓϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ. | → |
| ⲁⲓϫⲉⲙ-ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ. | |
| I found my father. |
| ⲁⲓϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ. | → |
| ⲁⲓϫⲉⲙϥ. | |
| I found him. |
Infinitives that allow this construction have three distinct forms: (1) the normal (absolute) dictionary form (ϫⲓⲙⲓ), (2) the prenominal form (ϫⲉⲙ-; note the conventional use of the single hyphen), and (3) the prepronominal form (ϫⲉⲙ⸗). For infinitives of some patterns these three forms are more or less predictable; for others there is much irregularity. We shall deal with the most important patterns individually in subsequent lessons. The forms of the pronouns to be suffixed to a given infinitive are very much the same as those suffixed to the prepronominal forms of the prepositions as given in §9.1. Other examples will be given as required.
11.2 Infinitives of the pattern ϭⲓ (i.e. consonant + ⲓ). Infinitives of this pattern show some irregularities, but three of these verbs (ϥⲁⲓ, ϯ, ϭⲓ) are especially frequent and their forms should be learned:
| ϯ | ϯ- | ⲧⲏⲓ⸗ | to give |
| ϭⲓ | ϭⲓ- | ϫⲉⲙ⸗ | to take |
| ϥⲁⲓ | ϥⲁⲓ- | ϥⲓⲧ⸗ | to raise, carry |
| ϣⲓ | ϣⲓ- | ϣⲓⲧ⸗ | to measure |
The verbs ⲥⲓ (to become sated) and ⲓ (to come) are intransitive and do not take direct objects. ϥⲁⲓ, ϣⲓ, and ⲥⲓ may also be spelled as ϥⲉⲓ, ϣⲉⲓ, and ⲥⲉⲓ; the spelling ⲧⲉⲓ for ϯ is rare.
Object pronouns are attached to these verbs as follows:
| ϭⲓⲧ |
| ϭⲓⲧⲕ |
| ϭⲓϯ |
| ϭⲓⲧϥ |
| ϫⲓⲧⲥ̄ |
| ϭⲓⲧⲛ |
| ϭⲓ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| ϭⲓⲧⲟⲩ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲧ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲕ |
| ⲧⲏⲓ |
| ⲧⲏⲓϥ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲥ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲛ |
| ϯ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| ⲧⲏⲓⲧⲟⲩ |
Note that ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ (2nd pers. pl.) is attached to the prenominal form of the infinitive; the prepronominal form is also found: ϭⲓⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ.
Conjugaison du Verbe.
1. une particule ou verbe auxiliaire,
2. le sujet, nom ou pronom affixe,
3. le verbe.
Le qualitatif ne s'emploie qu'aux trois premiers présents et à l'imparfait de l'indicatif.
Le tableau suivant donne:
1. la forme de l'auxiliaire uni aux pronoms affixes,
2. sa forme abrégée devant le nom sujet.
Pour compléter le temps, il faut, dans le premier cas, ajouter le verbe; dans le second, le nom sujet et le verbe. Ex: ϯ-ⲙⲉⲓ «j'aime», ϯⲛⲁ-ⲙⲉⲓ «j'aimerai»; ⲡⲓⲁⲗⲟⲩ ⲙⲉⲓ «l'enfant aime», ⲡⲓⲁⲗⲟⲩ ⲛⲁ-ⲙⲉⲓ «l'enfant aimera», etc.
| Indicatif | ||||||||
| Présent | Présent d'habitude | Imparfait | ||||||
| 1r | 2e | 3e | affirmatif | négatif | ||||
| Avec les suffixes. | Sing. | 1. | ϯ | ⲁⲓ | ⲉⲓ | ϣⲁⲓ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓ | ⲛⲁⲓ |
| 2 m. | ⲕ | ⲁⲕ | ⲉⲕ | ϣⲁⲕ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲕ | ⲛⲁⲕ | ||
| f. | ⲧⲉ | ⲁⲣⲉ | ⲉⲣⲉ | ϣⲁⲣⲉ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ϥ | ⲁϥ | ⲉϥ | ϣⲁϥ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥ | ⲛⲁϥ | ||
| f. | ⲥ | ⲁⲥ | ⲉⲥ | ϣⲁⲥ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲥ | ⲛⲁⲥ | ||
| Plur. | 1. | ⲧⲉⲛ | ⲁⲛ | ⲉⲛ | ϣⲁⲛ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲛ | ⲛⲁⲛ | |
| 2. | ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲉⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ϣⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ||
| 3. | ⲥⲉ | ⲁⲩ | ⲉⲩ | ϣⲁⲩ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲩ | ⲛⲁⲩ | ||
| Devant un nom. | rien | ⲁⲣⲉ- | ⲉⲣⲉ- | ϣⲁⲣⲉ- | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ- | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ- | ||
| Avec négation. | ⲛ̀ … ⲁⲛ | ⲛ̀ … ⲁⲛ | … ⲁⲛ | |||||
| … ⲁⲛ | ||||||||
| Futur | Futur énergique | Futur antérieur | ||||||
| 1r | 2e | 3e | affirmatif | négatif | ||||
| Avec les suffixes. | Sing. | 1. | ϯⲛⲁ | ⲁⲓⲛⲁ | ⲉⲓⲛⲁ | ⲉⲓⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲁ | ⲛⲁⲓⲛⲁ |
| 2 m. | ⲭⲛⲁ | ⲁⲭⲛⲁ | ⲉⲭⲛⲁ | ⲉⲕⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲕ | ⲛⲁⲭⲛⲁ | ||
| f. | ⲧⲉⲣⲁ | ⲁⲣⲉⲛⲁ | ⲉⲣⲉⲛⲁ | ⲉⲣⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉⲛⲁ | ||
| 3 m. | ϥⲛⲁ | ⲁϥⲛⲁ | ⲉϥⲛⲁ | ⲉϥⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥ | ⲛⲁϥⲛⲁ | ||
| f. | ⲥⲛⲁ | ⲁⲥⲛⲁ | ⲉⲥⲛⲁ | ⲉⲥⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲥ | ⲛⲁⲥⲛⲁ | ||
| Plur. | 1. | ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ | ⲁⲛⲛⲁ | ⲉⲛⲛⲁ | ⲉⲛⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲛ | ⲛⲁⲛⲛⲁ | |
| 2. | ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ | ⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ | ⲉⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ | ⲉⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ | ||
| 3. | ⲥⲉⲛⲁ | ⲁⲩⲛⲁ | ⲉⲩⲛⲁ | ⲉⲩⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩ | ⲛⲁⲩⲛⲁ | ||
| Devant un nom. | rien ⲛⲁ | ⲁⲣⲉ- ⲛⲁ | ⲉⲣⲉ- ⲛⲁ | ⲉⲣⲉ- | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ- | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ- ⲛⲁ | ||
| Avec négation. | ⲛ̀ … ⲁⲛ | ⲛ̀ … ⲁⲛ | … ⲁⲛ | |||||
| … ⲁⲛ | ||||||||
| Indicatif (suite) | Autres modes | |||||||
| 1r parfait | 2e parfait | Subjonctif | Optatif | |||||
| affirmatif | négatif | affirmatif | négatif | |||||
| Avec les suffixes. | Sing. | 1. | ⲁⲓ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲓ | ⲉⲧⲁⲓ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲁ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙⲁⲣⲓ |
| 2 m. | ⲁⲕ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕ | ⲉⲧⲁⲕ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲕ | ||
| f. | ⲁⲣⲉ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ | ⲉⲧⲁⲣⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙⲁⲣⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲁϥ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥ | ⲉⲧⲁϥ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥ | ||
| f. | ⲁⲥ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲥ | ⲉⲧⲁⲥ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲥ | ||
| Plur. | 1. | ⲁⲛ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛ | ⲉⲧⲁⲛ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲛ | |
| 2. | ⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲉⲧⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ | ||
| 3. | ⲁⲩ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲟⲩ | ⲉⲧⲁⲩ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩ ou ⲛ̀ⲥⲉ | ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙⲁⲣⲟⲩ | ||
| Devant un nom. | ⲁ- | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ- | ⲉⲧⲁ- | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ- | ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϣⲧⲉⲙ- | ⲙⲁⲣⲉ- | ||
| Avec négation. | ⲛ̀ … ⲁⲛ | |||||||
| Conditionnel | Pl.-q.-parfait | |||||||
| affirmatif | négatif | affirmatif | négatif | |||||
| Avec les suffixes. | Sing. | 1. | ⲁⲓϣⲁⲛ | ⲁⲓϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉ ⲁⲓ | ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓ | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 m. | ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛ | ⲁⲕϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉ ⲁⲕ | ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕ | ||||
| f. | ⲁⲣⲉϣⲁⲛ | ⲁⲣⲉϣⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉ ⲁⲣⲉ | ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ | ||||
| 3 m. | ⲁϥϣⲁⲛ | ⲁϥϣⲧⲉⲙ | ||||||
| f. | ⲁⲥϣⲁⲛ | ⲁⲥϣⲧⲉⲙ | ||||||
| Plur. | 1. | ⲁⲛϣⲁⲛ | ⲁⲛϣⲧⲉⲙ | |||||
| 2. | ⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲁⲛ | ⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲧⲉⲙ | ||||||
| 3. | ⲁⲩϣⲁⲛ | ⲁⲩϣⲧⲉⲙ | ||||||
| Devant un nom. | ⲁⲣⲉϣⲁⲛ- | ⲁⲣⲉϣⲧⲉⲙ- | ||||||
Les auxiliaires.
Comme on le voit, les auxiliaires sont affirmatifs ou négatifs.
Les auxiliaires affirmatifs peuvent se ramener à quatre types primitifs: ⲉ, ⲁ, ⲛⲉ, -ⲣⲉ.
De ⲉ se forment ⲁⲣⲉ 2e présent et ⲉⲣⲉ 3e présent.
De ⲁ se forme ⲉⲧⲁ, 2e parfait.
De ⲛⲉ se forme ⲛⲁⲣⲉ, imparfait.
De -ⲣⲉ se forment ⲙⲁⲣⲉ, optatif, et ⲑⲣⲟ, inf. causatif.
Les auxiliaires négatifs sont:
ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ (246).
Dans ⲉⲣⲉ, ⲁⲣⲉ, ⲛⲁⲣⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ, la syllabe ajoutée ⲣⲉ ne se maintient qu'à la 2 f. sg., à la 2 pl. et devant un nom; partout ailleurs elle disparaît.
Les auxiliaires simples ⲉ, ⲛⲉ ne s'emploient sous cette forme qu'avec des temps déjà constitués, pour en modifier le sens (247, 248, 364).
L'auxiliaire -ⲣⲉ ne s'emploie jamais seul.
A tous les temps formés de ⲛⲉ et de ⲛⲁⲣⲉ on peut employer après le verbe la copule ⲡⲉ.
Aux auxiliaires on unit, pour indiquer les personnes, les pronoms affixes donnés au n ⲟ 58.
Devant ⲛ et ⲟⲩ, l'affixe ⲕ de la 2 m. sg. se change ordinairement en ⲭ (23).
ⲭⲟⲩⲁⲃ «tu es saint»: ⲭⲛⲁⲃⲱⲗ «tu délieras».
Au premier présent et au premier futur, l'ancien auxiliaire ⲧⲉ ne s'est conservé qu'aux quatre personnes ϯ (de ⲧ et ⲓ), ⲧⲉ, ⲧⲉⲛ, ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ. Les autres personnes ne comprennent que deux éléments, le sujet et le verbe.
Pour le reste de la construction, ces deux temps sont semblables aux autres.
Quelques verbes se conjuguent impersonnellement avec l'affixe ⲥ du neutre pour sujet.
Les formes les plus fréquentes sont:
ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ «il arriva»;
ⲥ-ⲥϧⲏⲟⲩⲧ «il est écrit»;
ⲥ-ⲉⲙⲡϣⲁ «il convient»;
ⲥ-ⲙⲟⲕϩ «il est difficile»;
ⲥ-ⲙⲟⲧⲉⲛ «il est facile»;
ⲉⲥⲉϣⲱⲡⲓ «qu'il arrive».
Dans les livres liturgiques, à la fin des prières, ⲉⲥⲉϣⲱⲡⲓ signifie «ainsi soit-il».
I. Indicatif.
A. Présent.
Il y a quatre sortes de présents qui diffèrent par la forme et par le sens.
Premier présent.
Le premier est le présent d'actualité. Il indique une action ou énonce un fait qui a lieu au moment même où l'on parle:
ϯϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲧⲱⲛⲕ «je te le dis, lève-toi»[1].
ⲧⲉⲥⲙⲁⲣⲱⲟⲩⲧ (232, 2) ⲛ̀ⲑⲟ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲓϩⲓⲟⲙⲓ «tu es bénie entre les femmes»[2].
ϯⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ (232, 3) «je suis avec vous»[3].
La construction est la même lorsque le sujet est un nom. Celui-ci précède toujours le verbe, mais il peut en être séparé par un complément déterminatif:
ⲫⲓⲱⲧ ⲙⲉⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ «le Père aime le Fils»[4].
ⲧⲉϥⲙⲉⲑⲙⲏⲓ ϣⲟⲡ (232, 2) ϣⲁ ⲉⲛⲉϩ «sa justice demeure jusqu'à l'éternité»[5].
ⲡⲉⲕⲥⲁϩⲟⲩⲓ ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲱⲛ (232, 3) «ta malédiction est sur nous»[6].
Lorsque le sujet n'a pas d'article ou a l'article indéfini, il est introduit par ⲟⲩⲟⲛ dans la proposition affirmative et par ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ dans la proposition négative (303).
Second présent ⲁⲣⲉ-, ⲁ⸗.
1. Le second présent est le présent de l'interrogation, c'est le temps qui s'emploie quand la phrase est interrogative:
ⲁⲕⲑⲱⲛ ⲁⲇⲁⲙ (232, 3) «Adam, où es-tu?»[1].
ⲁⲕⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲥⲧⲩⲗⲟⲥ «vois-tu cette colonne?»[2].
ⲁⲣⲉⲛⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲑⲱⲛ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁⲣⲉⲛⲁ ⲉⲑⲱⲛ «d'où viens-tu et où vas-tu?»[3].
2. Le second présent s'emploie aussi, en dehors des phrases interrogatives, dans un sens général, sententieux, qualitatif:
ⲡⲉⲛⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲇⲉ ⲁϥϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲫⲉ (232, 3) «notre Dieu est au ciel»[4].
3. A ce temps, la négation ⲛ̀ s'unit au verbe tout à fait comme ⲛⲉ à l'imparfait.
On distinguera le 2 e présent négatif de l'imparfait négatif: 1° par l'accent que devrait toujours porter ⲛ̀; 2° par l'absence de ⲡⲉ qui accompagne toujours l'imparfait:
2e présent: ⲛ̀ⲁϥⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲁⲛ «il ne veut pas»,
imparfait: ⲛⲁϥⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ «il ne voulait pas».
Troisième présent ⲉⲣⲉ-, ⲉ⸗.
Le troisième présent est le présent de l'état. Il s'emploie pour exprimer une circonstance qui se rattache au sujet ou au régime du verbe principal; il correspond à peu près au participe français et au حال arabe. Il forme donc toujours une proposition dépendante:
ⲁϥⲓ̀ ⲟⲛ ϩⲁ ⲛⲉϥⲙⲁⲑⲏⲧⲏⲥ ⲁϥϫⲉⲙⲟⲩ ⲉⲩⲉⲛⲕⲟⲧ «il revint vers ses disciples et les trouva dormant»[5].
ⲁϥⲉⲣⲟⲩⲱ ⲉϥϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ «il répondit disant».
ⲁⲩⲓ̀ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉⲣⲉ ϩⲁⲛϩⲟⲡⲗⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧⲟⲩ «ils sortirent les armes à la main»[1].
ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲓⲥ ⲣⲉⲃⲉⲕⲕⲁ ⲛⲁⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉⲣⲉ ⲧⲉⲥϩⲩⲇⲣⲓⲁ ϩⲓ ⲧⲉⲥⲛⲁϩⲃⲓ «voici que Rébecca venait, sa jarre sur l'épaule»[2].
Présent d'habitude ϣⲁⲣⲉ-, ϣⲁ⸗».
1. Il indique un acte qui se répète, une coutume; quelquefois il a le sens du passé; le verbe ne s'emploie qu'à l'infinitif:
ϣⲁⲩⲥⲟϭⲛⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲟⲩⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲛⲓⲟⲩⲏⲃ «les prêtres délibèrent entr'eux»[3].
ϣⲁϥⲟϩⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲁⲛ̀ⲥⲁϩⲣⲉ «il avait coutume de se tenir dans un lieu désert»[4].
ϣⲁⲣⲉ ⲛⲓⲁⲥⲉⲃⲏⲥ ⲉⲣϩⲉⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ϩⲁⲛⲭⲣⲟϥ «les impies pratiquent la fraude»[5].
2. Le correspondant négatif de ce temps est fourni par l'auxiliaire ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ-, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁ⸗ qui semble être composé de ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ et de ⲁⲣⲉ:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲩϣⲛⲁϩⲙⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲡⲟⲗⲉⲙⲟⲥ «ils ne peuvent se sauver de la guerre»[6].
Des dieux ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲩⲛⲁⲩ ⲟⲩⲇⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ «qui ne voient ni n'entendent»[7].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ ⲡⲉⲥϧⲏⲃⲥ ϭⲉⲛⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲉϫⲱⲣϩ ⲧⲏⲣϥ «sa lampe ne s'éteint pas de toute la nuit»[8].
B. Futur.
Les trois premiers futurs sont formés des trois premiers présents par l'addition de ⲛⲁ-, forme abrégée du verbe ⲛⲟⲩⲓ «être sur le point de, aller».
Ils offrent respectivement les mêmes nuances de sens que les présents correspondants.
Premier futur.
ϯⲛⲁ-ⲧⲁⲕⲱⲟⲩ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ «je les perdrai avec la terre»[1].
ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ-ⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲓ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ-ϫⲉⲙⲧ ⲁⲛ «vous me chercherez et vous ne me trouverez pas»[2].
La 2 f. sing. ⲧⲉⲣⲁ est de formation spéciale; l'origine de cette forme n'est pas absolument certaine.
Le nom sujet se comporte comme au premier présent:
ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲛⲁϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ «le Seigneur vous visitera»[3].
ⲫⲁⲣⲁⲱ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ «Pharaon ne vous écoutera pas»[4]. Lorsque le sujet est indéterminé, il est introduit par ⲟⲩⲟⲛ dans la proposition affirmative et par ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ dans la proposition négative (303).
Deuxième futur ⲁⲣⲉ- ⲛⲁ-, ⲁ⸗ ⲛⲁ-.
ⲁⲩⲛⲁⲭⲱⲃ ⲑⲱⲛ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩϯ «où se cacheront-ils avec leurs dieux?»[1].
ⲁⲩⲛⲁⲉⲣ ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ⲛⲓⲁⲅⲅⲉⲗⲟⲥ «ils seront comme les anges»[2].
ⲁⲣⲉ ⲧⲁϣⲃⲱⲃⲓ ⲛⲁⲉⲣⲙⲉⲗⲉⲧⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ϩⲁⲛⲙⲉⲑⲙⲏⲓ «mon gosier méditera la justice»[3].
Troisième futur ⲉⲣⲉ- ⲛⲁ-, ⲉ⸗ ⲛⲁ-.
ⲉϥⲉⲟⲩⲛⲟϥ ⲉϥⲛⲁⲣⲱⲧ «il se réjouira en croissant»[4].
ⲡⲓϧⲁⲉ ⲛ̀ⲥⲟⲡ ⲡⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ ⲉⲣⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ ⲛⲁ-ϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲗⲁⲕⲁⲛⲏ «c'est la dernière fois que ton père jette de l'eau dans un bassin»[5].
Futur énergique ⲉⲣⲉ-, ⲉ⸗ ⲉ-.
Ce futur exprime la certitude, la volonté, le commandement:
ⲉⲕⲉⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ ⲡⲉⲕϣⲫⲏⲣ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕⲣⲏϯ «tu aimeras ton prochain comme toi-même»[6].
ⲉⲣⲉⲙⲓⲥⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ «tu enfanteras un fils»[7].
Il est formé du 3e présent et de la préposition ⲉ «vers». La 2 f. sg. ⲉⲣⲉ est pour ⲉⲣⲉⲉ. Devant un nom, on emploie ⲉⲣⲉ- seul ou ⲉⲣⲉ- avec répétition de l'auxiliaire:
ⲉⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲭⲁ-ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲧⲉϥⲙⲁⲩ «l'homme laissera son père et sa mère»[8].
ⲉⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲟⲩⲏⲃ ⲉϥⲉⲧⲁⲗⲟ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲙⲁⲛ̀ⲉⲣϣⲱⲟⲩϣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲟⲩⲧⲁϩ «le prêtre offrira des fruits sur l'autel»[1].
Le correspondant négatif est fourni par l'auxiliaire ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ-, ⲛ̀ⲛ⸗:
ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲕϧⲱⲧⲉⲃ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲕϭⲓⲟⲩⲓ «tu ne tueras pas, tu ne voleras pas»[2].
ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ϧⲱⲑⲃⲉⲥ «le Seigneur ne la tuera pas»[3].
C. Imparfait. ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-, ⲛⲁ⸗ … ⲡⲉ.
Ce temps a le sens de l'imparfait français:
ⲛⲁⲣⲉ ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲭⲏ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲓⲁⲗⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ «Dieu était avec l'enfant»[4].
ⲛⲁϥ-ϧⲁϫⲱⲟⲩ (232, 3) ⲡⲉ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲫⲁⲣⲁⲱ «Pharaon était à leur tête»[5].
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲛⲁⲓⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ «moi, je ne le connaissais pas»[6].
Quand le sujet est un nom, on répète parfois l'auxiliaire:
ⲛⲁⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲗⲁⲟⲥ ⲧⲏⲣϥ ⲛⲁϥϫⲟⲩϣⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲁϫⲱϥ «tout le peuple l'attendait»[7].
Imparfait du futur ⲛⲁⲣⲉ- ⲛⲁ, ⲛⲁ⸗ ⲛⲁ … ⲡⲉ.
Ce temps signifie «être sur le point de, aller» à l'imparfait.
Il correspond au participe futur latin. Il a aussi le sens du futur antérieur français:
ⲑⲁⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲛⲁⲙⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ «elle allait mourir (erat moritura)»[8].
ⲛⲁⲣⲉ ⲡⲁⲥⲟⲛ ⲛⲁⲙⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ «mon frère ne serait pas mort»[9].
ⲉⲛⲉ ⲁⲕⲧⲁⲙⲟⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲛⲁⲓⲛⲁⲟⲩⲟⲣⲡⲕ ⲡⲉ ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩ ⲟⲩⲛⲟϥ «si tu m'avais averti, je t'aurais renvoyé avec joie»[1].
D. Parfait.
Premier parfait ⲁ-, ⲁ⸗.
Le premier parfait indique une action complètement passée; c'est le temps historique:
ⲁϥⲱⲣⲕ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ «le Seigneur a juré»[2].
ⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲉⲣϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ ⲉⲙⲁϣⲱ «il le vit et s'étonna beaucoup»[3].
ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁ ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲑⲁⲙⲓⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ «et Dieu créa l'homme»[4].
Lorsque le sujet est un nom, l'auxiliaire peut être répété avec l'affixe:
ⲁ ⲡⲟⲩϧⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲁϥϭⲓⲥⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲙⲑⲟ ⲙ̀ⲫϯ «leur voix s'est élevée devant Dieu»[5].
Les formes de ce temps se confondent avec celles du 2e présent; on les distinguera facilement au moyen du contexte.
Pour ⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ 2 pl., on trouve souvent ⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ (cf. A B. p. 47, 48).
La négation se fait par l'auxiliaire ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ-, ⲙ̀ⲡ⸗:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ ϩⲗⲓ ⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲥⲟⲛ «personne ne vit son frère»[6].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲣⲡⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «il ne voulut pas les renvoyer»[7].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ a quelquefois le sens d'un futur prohibitif comme ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ (cf. A B. p. 102):
ⲟⲩⲏⲣⲡ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩⲥⲓⲕⲉⲣⲁ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲟⲩ «vous ne boirez ni vin ni boisson enivrante»[1].
Deuxième parfait ⲉⲧⲁ-, ⲉⲧⲁ⸗.
Le deuxième parfait indique aussi une action complètement passée. Par opposition au premier parfait il s'emploie:
1. Dans les propositions interrogatives:
ⲉⲧⲁⲕⲓ̀ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ϩⲱⲃ «pour quelle chose es-tu venu ici?»[2].
ϯⲉⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲉⲧⲁⲓⲓ̀ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲑⲱⲛ «je sais d'où je suis venu»[3]. (Interrogation indirecte).
2. Dans les propositions subordonnées et surtout dans les propositions relatives:
ⲧⲉⲛⲉⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲉⲧⲁⲕⲓ̀ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲫϯ «nous savons que tu es venu de Dieu»[4].
3. Souvent il peut se traduire par « lorsque» avec le parfait:
ⲉⲧⲁ ⲡⲓⲛⲁⲩ ϣⲱⲡⲓ «lorsque le moment fut venu»[5].
ⲉⲧⲁⲥⲓ̀ ⲇⲉ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ϯϣⲱϯ ⲁⲥⲙⲁϩ-ⲧⲉⲥϩⲩⲇⲣⲓⲁ quand elle fut arrivée au bord du puits, elle remplit sa jarre»[6].
ⲉⲧⲁ ⲧⲟⲟⲩⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ «lorsque le matin fut arrivé»[7].
Dans ce cas, l'auxiliaire négatif est ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲡⲉ-, ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲡ⸗ composé de ⲉⲧⲁ et ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ:
ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲉⲧⲉⲙⲡⲉ ϯϭⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ϫⲉⲙ-ⲙⲁⲛ̀ⲉⲙⲧⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲥϭⲁⲗⲁⲩϫ ⲁⲥⲧⲁⲥⲑⲟ «la colombe, n'ayant point trouvé d'endroit pour reposer ses pieds, s'en revint»[8].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧ⸗.
Avec les suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϯ | 1. | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲕ | 2. | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥ | 3. | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲥ | ||
Devant un nom: ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ-.
Cet auxiliaire a deux sens:
1. «Pas encore» avec le passé.
ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲥⲓ̀ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲧⲁⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ «mon heure n'est pas encore venue»[1].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ ⲉⲙⲓ ⲟⲩⲇⲉ ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫⲙⲉⲩⲓ ⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲉ̅ ⲛ̀ⲱⲓⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲓⲉ̅ ⲛ̀ϣⲟ «vous n'avez pas encore compris et vous ne vous rappelez pas les cinq pains des cinq mille hommes»[2].
2. «Avant que, avant de».
ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ ⲫⲓⲗⲓⲡⲡⲟⲥ ⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ «avant que Philippe t'appelle»[3].
ⲁⲩⲟⲩⲱⲙ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲟⲩⲛ̀ⲕⲟⲧ «ils mangèrent avant de se coucher»[4].
Remarque.
Sur le modèle de ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉ et ϣⲁⲧⲉ pour le subjonctif, on a, de ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ, formé ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲛⲧⲉ- qui est moins usuel et moins régulier.
E. Temps composés.
1°. Avec ⲛⲉ.
L'auxiliaire ⲛⲉ s'unit à quelques autres auxiliaires et leur donne le sens du parfait s'ils avaient celui du présent, et du plus-que-parfait s'ils avaient celui du parfait. Il s'emploie:
1. Avec ⲁ du parfait pour former le plus-que-parfait de l'indicatif:
ⲛⲉ ⲁ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲣⲉϧⲧ ⲛⲓⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲡⲉ «le Seigneur avait renversé les villes»[1].
2. Avec ϣⲁⲣⲉ:
ⲛⲉ ϣⲁϥⲓ̀ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲙ̀ⲫⲛⲁⲩ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲕⲁⲩⲙⲁ «il avait coutume de sortir au moment de la chaleur»[2].
3. Avec ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ:
ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ ⲓ︤ⲏ︦ⲥ︥ ϭⲓⲱⲟⲩ ⲡⲉ «Jésus n'avait pas encore été glorifié»[3].
2°. Avec ⲉ.
Cet auxiliaire forme les composés suivants:
| ⲉⲁ- | premier parfait, |
| ⲉϣⲁⲣⲉ- | présent d'habitude, |
| ⲉⲛⲁⲣⲉ- | imparfait, |
ⲉⲙⲡⲉ, ⲉⲙⲡⲁⲣⲉ, ⲉⲙⲡⲁⲧⲉ.
Dans ces trois derniers on néglige souvent d'écrire ⲉ, et il reste: ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ, ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ.
Ces différents temps, avec leur sens respectif, ont la même syntaxe que le 3e présent formé de ⲉ tout seul (238).
Ils forment des propositions dépendantes qui suivent la proposition principale sans conjonction, comme une sorte d' apposition ou comme un participe français. Elles peuvent aussi la précéder:
ⲁϥⲧⲟⲩⲛⲟⲥⲥ ⲉⲁϥⲁⲙⲟⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥϫⲓϫ «il la ressuscita après avoir pris sa main»[1].
ⲡⲱⲥ ⲫⲁⲓ ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲛ̀ⲥϧⲁⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲁⲃⲟ «comment celui-ci sait-il écrire, n'ayant pas étudié?»[2].
ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁⲃⲣⲁⲁⲙ ⲛⲉ ⲟⲩϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲡⲉ ⲉⲁϥⲁⲓⲁⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲛⲉϥⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ «et Abraham était devenu vieux, ses jours s'étant augmentés»[3].
ⲉⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲉⲙⲓ ⲟⲩⲛ ϫⲉ ϩⲁⲛⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲁⲛ ⲛⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲉⲣϩⲟϯ ϧⲁⲧⲟⲩϩⲏ «sachant donc qu'ils ne sont pas des dieux, ne les craignez pas»[4].
II. Subjonctif.
Le subjonctif est formé de la particule ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ- ⲛ̀ⲧ⸗ dans laquelle ⲛ est parfois supprimé:
ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ⲫⲏ ⲉⲧⲉϥⲛⲁⲓ̀ ⲧⲉϥⲉⲣⲃⲟⲏⲑⲓⲛ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ «j'ai quelqu'un qui viendra me secourir»[5].
Comme sens, le subjonctif n'est limité à aucun temps en particulier; il peut indiquer le présent, le passé et le futur. Il est d'un usage très fréquent en copte. Il s'emploie:
1. Dans la dépendance immédiate, sans conjonction, après les verbes qui expriment la volonté, l'exhortation, la demande, le commandement:
ⲭⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲧⲁⲥⲑⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲉⲧⲁⲕⲓ̀ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧϥ «tu veux que je ramène ton fils au pays d'où tu es venu?»[1].
ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲛⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉ ϯⲁⲗⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛϣⲉⲛⲥ ⲉ ⲫⲁ ⲣⲱⲥ «appelons la fille pour lui demander ce qui lui plaît»[2].
ϩⲉⲛⲕ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϫⲟⲙϫⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ «approche-toi de moi, mon fils, pour que je te palpe»[3].
ϣⲁⲧⲟⲩ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲫⲁⲥⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲟⲩⲛⲟϥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «immole-les et fais-les cuire afin que je me réjouisse»[4].
2. Après les verbes impersonnels comme ⲥϣⲉ, ϩⲱϯ «il faut», ⲁⲛⲁⲅⲕⲏ, ⲭⲣⲓⲁ «(il y a) nécessité», ⲟⲩⲟⲛϣϫⲟⲙ «il se peut», ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ «il ne se peut pas», et les verbes employés impersonnellement avec l'affixe neutre ⲥ:
ⲁⲛⲁⲅⲕⲏ ⲅⲁⲣ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩⲓ̀ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲛⲓⲥⲕⲁⲛⲇⲁⲗⲟⲛ «il est nécessaire que les scandales arrivent»[5].
ϩⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϭⲓ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲙⲏϣ ⲛ̀ϧⲓⲥⲓ «il faut que le fils de l'homme souffre beaucoup»[6].
3. Dans l'état de dépendance éloignée pour exprimer le but, l'intention, la crainte.
Il est alors précédé d'une des conjonctions grecques suivantes:
ϩⲓⲛⲁ, ϩⲱⲡⲱⲥ «afin que», ϩⲱⲥⲧⲉ «de sorte que», ⲙⲏⲡⲱⲥ, ⲙⲏⲡⲟⲧⲉ «de peur que», ⲓⲙⲏϯ «à moins que», ou des conjonctions coptes ϫⲉ «que», ϣⲁ «jusqu'à ce que».
ⲙⲏⲡⲟⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲓⲁⲛⲧⲓⲇⲓⲕⲟⲥ ⲧⲏⲓⲕ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲕⲣⲓⲧⲏⲥ «de peur que l'adversaire ne te livre au juge»[1].
ⲁϫⲟⲥ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲛⲓ ϫⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲉⲣⲱⲓⲕ «dis à cette pierre qu'elle se change en pain»[2].
ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛϭⲟϩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ϩⲓⲛⲁ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲧⲉⲙⲙⲟⲩ «vous n'y toucherez pas afin de ne pas mourir»[3].
Le subjonctif et ϣⲁ «jusqu'à ce que» s'unissent dans l'écriture:
Avec les suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲁ ou ϣⲁⲛϯ | 1. | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲕ | 2. | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉϥ | 3. | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲟⲩ |
| f. | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲥ | ||
Devant un nom: ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉ-
Cette forme s'abrège en perdant le ⲛ et devient le subjonctif beaucoup plus fréquent:
Avec les suffixes:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ϣⲁϯ | 1. | ϣⲁⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ϣⲁⲧⲉⲕ | 2. | ϣⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ϣⲁⲧⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ϣⲁⲧⲉϥ | 3. | ϣⲁⲧⲟⲩ |
| f. | ϣⲁⲧⲉⲥ | ||
Devant un nom: ϣⲁⲧⲉ-
ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ϣⲁϯϫⲟⲥ ⲛⲁⲥ «reste là jusqu'à ce que je te le dise»[4].
ⲟⲩⲕⲉⲣⲙⲓ ⲉϥⲉⲓ̀ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲫⲉ ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ ⲉϫⲱⲕ ϣⲁⲧⲉϥϥⲟⲧⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «la cendre descendra du ciel sur ta tête jusqu'à ce qu'elle te détruise»[5].
ϣⲁⲧⲉ ⲡⲉⲙⲃⲟⲛ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡϫⲱⲛⲧ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕⲥⲟⲛ ⲕⲟⲧϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲁⲣⲟⲕ «jusqu'à ce que la colère et la fureur de ton frère se détourne de toi»[1].
4. Le subjonctif s'emploie souvent pour éviter la répétition du même temps; dans ce cas, la dépendance n'est qu'apparente, les propositions sont en réalité coordonnées. En général elles se suivent sans conjonction, quelquefois elles sont unies par ⲟⲩⲟϩ. Dans la traduction, le subjonctif se met au même temps que le verbe qui précède.
Cet emploi du subjonctif peut avoir lieu à tous les temps et à tous les modes. A l'indicatif présent:
ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϥϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϫⲣⲟϫ … ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲛ̀ⲕⲟⲧ «comme un homme qui jette sa semence … et s'endort»[2].
Au présent d'habitude:
ϣⲁϥⲓ̀ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲥⲁⲧⲁⲛⲁⲥ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲱⲗⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ «Satan vient et enlève la parole»[3].
Au futur:
ϯⲛⲁϭⲟϫⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲧⲁϩⲟ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲫⲱϣ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϣⲱⲗ «je poursuivrai, j'atteindrai, je diviserai, je pillerai»[4].
ⲉⲩⲉⲑⲉⲗⲏⲗ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩⲟⲩⲛⲟϥ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲛⲏ ⲉⲑⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲙⲉⲑⲙⲏⲓ «ils se réjouiront et exulteront, ceux qui veulent ma justice»[5].
Au conditionnel:
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲓ̀ ⲉ ⲧⲁⲫⲩⲗⲏ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩϣⲧⲉⲙϯ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉⲕⲉϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲕⲧⲟⲩⲃⲏⲟⲩⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲁ ⲡⲁⲁⲛⲁϣ «si tu vas vers ma tribu et qu'ils ne te donnent pas, tu seras libéré de mon serment»[1].
A l'impératif:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣϩⲱⲗ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲭⲁⲧ «ne pars pas, ne m'abandonne pas»[2].
A l'optatif:
ⲙⲁⲣⲟⲩⲟⲩⲛⲟϥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩⲑⲉⲗⲏⲗ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ϩⲁⲛⲉⲑⲛⲟⲥ «que les nations exultent et se réjouissent»[3].
Après l'infinitif avec ⲉ, ⲉⲑⲣⲉ:
ⲁϥⲭⲁϥ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲓⲡⲁⲣⲁⲇⲓⲥⲟⲥ ⲉⲑⲣⲉϥⲉⲣϩⲱⲃ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲁⲣⲉϩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ «il le plaça dans le paradis pour y travailler et le garder»[4].
Après une proposition relative:
ⲫⲏ ⲉⲑⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲛⲁϩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ «celui qui voit le Fils et croit en lui»[5].
III. Optatif.
Il est formé de -ⲣⲉ et de l'impératif ⲙⲁ-: ⲙⲁⲣⲉ-, ⲙⲁⲣ⸗ «donne, accorde».
Ce temps exprime le souhait, le désir, l'exhortation: ⲙⲁⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ ⲓⲛⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ϩⲁⲛⲥⲙⲉϩ ⲛ̀ⲥⲓⲙ «que la terre produise des herbes verdoyantes»[6].
ⲡⲉⲧⲉϩⲛⲁⲕ ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥϣⲱⲡⲓ «que ta volonté soit faite»[7].
ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲛϣⲉⲡϩⲙⲟⲧ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧϥ ⲙ̀ⲫϯ «remercions Dieu»[8].
Il reste en copte une seule forme d'optatif sans infinitif: ⲙⲁⲣⲟⲛ «allons».
IV. Impératif.
1. Pour le plus grand nombre des verbes l'infinitif sert d'impératif sing. et plur.:
ⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲓ «suis-moi»[1].
ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ «aime le Seigneur».
ⲛⲁϩⲙⲉⲧ «délivre-moi»[2].
2. Quelques verbes prennent un ⲁ devant l'infinitif:
ⲁⲛⲁⲩ «vois»,
ⲁⲟⲩⲱⲙ «mange»,
ⲁϫⲱ ⲁϫⲉ- ⲁϫⲟ⸗, ⲁϫⲟⲥ «dis».
3. Les trois verbes ⲓⲛⲓ ⲓⲣⲓ ⲱⲗⲓ forment ainsi leur impératif:
| ⲁⲛⲓⲟⲩⲓ | ⲁⲛⲓ- | ⲁⲛⲓⲧ⸗ | «porte», |
| ⲁⲣⲓⲟⲩⲓ | ⲁⲣⲓ- | ⲁⲣⲓⲧ⸗ | «fais», |
| ⲁⲗⲓⲟⲩⲓ | ⲁⲗⲓ- | ⲁⲗⲓⲧ⸗ | «ôte». |
4. Autres impératifs:
ⲁⲙⲟⲩ, fém. ⲁⲙⲏ, pl. ⲁⲙⲱⲓⲛⲓ «viens, venez»,
ⲁⲩⲓⲥ «donne»: ⲁⲩⲓⲥ ⲧⲉⲕϫⲓϫ «donne ta main»[3].
ⲙⲟⲓ ⲙⲁ- ⲙⲏⲓ⸗ «accorde, donne» sert d'impératif à ϯ.
ⲙⲟ, fém. ⲙⲉ pl. ⲙⲱⲓⲛⲓ «prends, prenez».
5. ⲙⲁ- forme l'impératif de tous les verbes composés de ϯ (230) et de tous les verbes causatifs formés de ⲧ.
ⲧⲟⲩⲃⲟ «purifier», impér. ⲙⲁⲧⲟⲩⲃⲟ;
ⲑⲉⲃⲓⲟ «abaisser», impér. ⲙⲁⲑⲉⲃⲓⲟ.
On a aussi: ⲙⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ «va-t'en», ⲙⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ «allez-vous en».
6. La négation de l'impératif s'obtient en plaçant:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣ- devant l'infinitif simple et ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛ- devant l'infinitif causatif:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲉⲣϩⲟϯ «ne craignez pas».
ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛⲑⲣⲉ ϩⲗⲓ ⲉⲙⲓ «ne le fais savoir à personne»[1].
ϯϯϩⲟ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣϩⲱⲗ «je t'en prie, mon père, ne pars pas»[2].
7. Lorsqu'il y a plusieurs impératifs à la suite, le premier verbe seul a la forme de l'impératif, les autres prennent l'auxiliaire du subjonctif (252); à moins qu'ils ne soient complètement indépendants les uns des autres, comme dans l'exemple: ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲧⲁⲡⲣⲟⲥⲉⲩⲭⲏ ϭⲓⲥⲙⲏ ⲉⲡⲁϯϩⲟ «Seigneur, écoute ma prière, prête l'oreille à ma demande»[3].
V. Infinitif.
1. Formes.
Il y a deux sortes d'infinitif: l'infinitif simple ⲃⲱⲗ «délier» et l'infinitif causatif ⲑⲣⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ «faire délier»:
| Sg. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲑⲣⲓ | 1. | ⲑⲣⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲑⲣⲉⲕ | 2. | ⲑⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛ, ⲑⲣⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲑⲣⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲑⲣⲉϥ | 3. | ⲑⲣⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲑⲣⲉⲥ | ||
Devant un nom: ⲑⲣⲟ ⲑⲣⲉ-.
ⲑⲣⲟ (ⲧ + ⲓⲣⲓ 23, 227) est le causatif du verbe ⲓⲣⲓ «faire».
L'infinitif causatif peut s'employer partout où s'emploie l'infinitif simple:
ⲥⲉⲑⲣⲟ ⲛ̀ⲑⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫϯ ⲟⲩⲛⲟϥ «ils font se réjouir la cité de Dieu»[1].
ⲁ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲑⲣⲉ ⲡϩⲏⲧ ⲙ̀ⲫⲁⲣⲁⲱ ⲛ̀ϣⲟⲧ «le Seigneur endurcit le cœur de Pharaon»[2].
ⲛⲓⲁⲥⲉⲃⲏⲥ ϣⲁⲣⲉ ⲫⲛⲟⲃⲓ ⲑⲣⲟⲩⲧⲁⲕⲟ «le péché cause la perte des impies»[3].
ⲉⲓⲉⲑⲣⲉϥⲁϣⲁⲓ «je le ferai se multiplier»[4].
Pour son emploi avec ⲉ, voir 263, 264; avec ϫⲓⲛ, voir 266 et suivants.
La négation à l'infinitif se fait au moyen de ϣⲧⲉⲙ: ϣⲧⲉⲙⲃⲱⲗ «ne pas délier», ϣⲧⲉⲙⲑⲣⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ «ne pas faire délier». Cette forme négative ne s'emploie dans la conjugaison qu'à deux temps, au conditionnel et au subjonctif. Aux autres temps, la négation est exprimée par des auxiliaires ou des adverbes. Mais hors de la conjugaison, elle peut remplir les mêmes fonctions que l'infinitif affirmatif:
ⲱⲣⲕ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲙ̀ⲫⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲉϣⲧⲉⲙϭⲓⲧ ⲛ̀ϫⲟⲛⲥ «jure-moi par Dieu de ne pas m'opprimer»[5].
ⲁⲓⲁⲣⲉϩ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲉ ϣⲧⲉⲙⲭⲁ ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ϭⲣⲟϥ «j'ai veillé sur moi pour ne donner aucun scandale»[6].
Il est un troisième infinitif qu'on pourrait appeler potentiel; il se forme en plaçant ϣ- «pouvoir» devant l'infinitif simple ou causatif: ϣⲃⲱⲗ «pouvoir délier», ϣⲑⲣⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ «pouvoir faire délier». Il est en réalité composé de deux verbes, mais dont le premier ϣ- ne s'emploie que dans ce cas particulier. Lorsque le second verbe commence par ⲥ, cette lettre disparaît parfois après le ϣ: ϣⲁϫⲓ pour ϣⲥⲁϫⲓ «pouvoir dire» qui est d'ailleurs la forme ordinaire.
Cet infinitif est d'un usage fréquent; il peut se rencontrer dans tous les verbes et à tous les temps:
ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥϣⲛⲁϩⲙⲉϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲡⲟⲗⲉⲙⲟⲥ «il ne peut se sauver de la guerre»[1].
ⲥⲉⲛⲁϣⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧⲟⲩ «ils pourront se lever d'eux-mêmes»[2].
ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲃⲉⲗⲗⲉ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩϣⲑⲣⲉϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲙ̀ⲃⲟⲗ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϥϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲁⲛⲁⲅⲕⲏ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩϣⲛⲁϩⲙⲉϥ «ils ne pourront rendre la vue à l'aveugle, ils ne pourront délivrer l'homme de la nécessité»[3].
A ce genre d'infinitif appartient le verbe si fréquent, ϣϫⲉⲙϫⲟⲙ «pouvoir», composé de ϣ-ϫⲉⲙ- «trouver» (231) et ϫⲟⲙ «force». ϣ s'unit aussi au substantif ϫⲟⲙ dans les expressions de cette sorte: ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ ⲛⲏⲓ «je n'ai pas le pouvoir».
2. Emploi de l'infinitif.
De même qu'en français, l'infinitif de tous les verbes coptes peut s'employer, avec ou sans son régime, comme sujet ou comme complément direct et indirect dans une proposition.
1. Infinitif sujet.
Les propositions coptes qui ont un infinitif comme sujet réel sont tout à fait semblables aux propositions françaises de même genre.
L'infinitif précédé de ⲉ (en français de, à) vient toujours après l'attribut:
ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ϫⲉ ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲛ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲉ-ⲧⲟⲙ-ⲧ ⲉ ⲫϯ «il est bon pour moi d'adhérer à Dieu»[1].
ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲏⲓ ⲉ-ⲥⲁϫⲓ «j'ai à parler»[2].
Cette tournure s'emploie surtout avec le verbe ⲥϣⲉ «il faut» et les verbes conjugués impersonnellement; dans ce cas on emploie ⲛ̀ quand l'infinitif, qui est sujet réel, suit immédiatement le verbe, ⲉ quand il en est séparé:
ⲡⲉⲧⲥϣⲉ ⲛ̀-ⲁⲓϥ ⲁⲛ «ce qu'il ne faut pas faire»[3].
ⲥϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ⲉ-ϯϩⲱϯ ⲙ̀ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ «il nous faut payer le tribut au roi»[4].
ⲛⲁⲛⲉⲥ ⲁⲛ ⲉⲑⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧϥ «il n'est pas bon que l'homme soit tout seul»[5].
2. Infinitif complément.
1. Comme complément direct, l'infinitif se trouve quelquefois uni, sans particule, à la forme abrégée des verbes:
ⲁⲩⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ ⲕⲓⲙ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩⲫⲁⲧ «ils ont aimé remuer leurs pieds»[6].
2. En dehors de ce cas, assez rare d'ailleurs, l'infinitif, qu'il soit complément direct ou autre, prend toujours une préposition, en général ⲛ̀ ou ⲉ.
a. Infinitif complément avec ⲛ̀.
ⲛ̀ ne s'emploie qu'avec l'infinitif simple lorsqu'il suit immédiatement le mot dont il dépend.
1. Comme complément direct:
ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲛ̀ⲉⲣⲇⲟⲕⲓⲙⲁⲍⲓⲛ «vous savez éprouver»[1].
2. Comme complément circonstantiel de manière:
ⲁϥⲉⲣϩⲏⲧⲥ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁϫⲓ «il commença à parler»[2].
ⲛⲁϥⲛⲏⲟⲩ ⲛ̀-ⲁϣⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ «il allait en croissant»[3].
3. Comme complément déterminatif:
ⲡⲥⲏⲟⲩ ⲛ̀-ϯ «le temps de donner»[4].
ⲙ̀ⲡⲟⲩϣϫⲉⲙϫⲟⲙ ⲛ̀-ⲟϩⲓ «ils ne purent rester»[5].
4. Après les verbes qui signifient «être facile, être difficile, être digne de»:
ⲙⲟⲧⲉⲛ ⲛ̀-ϫⲉⲙ-ϥ «facile à trouver»[6].
ϧⲟⲥⲓ ⲛ̀-ϫⲉⲙ-ⲟⲩ «difficiles à trouver»[7].
ⲁⲣⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲛ̀ⲉⲙⲡϣⲁ ⲛ̀ϫⲟⲥ «rends-nous dignes de dire»[8].
Dans tous ces cas, lorsque l'infinitif est séparé du mot dont il dépend, on emploie ⲉ.
b. Infinitif complément avec ⲉ.
Avec ⲉ on peut employer l'infinitif simple ou l'infinitif causatif.
L'infinitif causatif exprime le sujet; on l'emploie donc lorsque le sujet de l'infinitif doit être exprimé, c.-à-d. lorsqu'il est différent de celui du verbe principal ou même lorsqu'il n'est pas différent, mais qu'on veut le faire ressortir.
Il faut remarquer, dans ce cas, que l'infinitif causatif n'a plus son sens propre et se traduit comme l'infinitif simple.
L'infinitif simple ou causatif s'emploie avec ⲉ:
1. Comme complément direct même là où l'on pourrait employer ⲛ̀, mais spécialement après les verbes qui signifient «vouloir, désirer, demander, ordonner, jurer, laisser».
ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲉ-ϯ «vous savez donner»[1].
ⲁϥⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉ-ⲓ̀ «il voulut venir»[2].
ϯⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉⲑⲣⲓⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲡⲓⲑⲙⲏⲓ «je veux marcher sur les traces du juste»[3].
ⲁⲓⲉⲣⲉⲡⲓⲑⲩⲙⲓⲛ ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲱⲙ «j'ai désiré manger»[4].
ⲕⲉⲣⲉⲧⲓⲛ ⲉ-ⲥⲱ «tu demandes à boire»[5].
ⲁϥϩⲟⲛϩⲉⲛ ⲉ-ϣⲧⲉⲙϫⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ϩⲗⲓ «il ordonna de ne le dire à personne»[6].
ⲁϥⲱⲣⲕ ⲉ-ϯ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲕⲁϩⲓ «il a juré de te donner la terre»[7].
ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥⲭⲁ ⲡⲓⲣⲉϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ ⲉ-ⲓ̀ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ «il ne laissera pas entrer le destructeur»[8].
2. Comme complément circonstantiel pour marquer la fin, le but, l'intention:
ⲉϥⲉⲥⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲉ ϣⲁⲣⲓ ⲉ ⲛⲓⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ «le Seigneur passera pour frapper les Egyptiens»[9].
ⲁⲩϧⲱⲛⲧ ⲉ ⲕⲁϣ ⲡⲓⲣⲟ «ils approchèrent pour briser la porte»[1].
ⲁϥⲧⲁⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲉ ϥⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲓⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «le Seigneur nous a envoyés pour raser cette ville»[2].
ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲉ ⲛⲁϩⲙⲉⲧ ⲉ ⲡⲧⲱⲟⲩ «je ne puis me sauver à la montagne»[3].
c. Infinitif complément avec d'autres prépositions.
L'infinitif, complément circonstantiel, peut encore recevoir d'autrès prépositions: telles sont ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ et ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ.
Après ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ on emploie l'infinitif simple:
ⲛⲁϥⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲧⲁⲕⲟ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲩⲥⲏⲥ «il cherchait à perdre Moïse»[4].
ⲉⲩⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲥⲁϫⲓ «ils demandent à parler»[5].
Après ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ on emploie l'infinitif causatif:
ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲑⲣⲉϥⲉⲣϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ «lorsqu'il eut vieilli»[6].
ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲑⲣⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ϣⲁⲣⲓ ⲉ ⲫⲓⲁⲣⲟ ⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ «après que le Seigneur eut frappé le fleuve d'Egypte»[7].
VI. Substantif Verbal.
1. Formation.
Le substantif verbal (مصدر) se forme de deux manières:
1. Au moyen de l'infinitif simple lui-même:
ⲡⲓ-ⲃⲱⲗ «l'action de délier».
2. Au moyen de ϫⲓⲛ et de l'infinitif simple ou causatif.
L'infinitif causatif est toujours à l'état construit ou pronominal: ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ, ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣ⸗ ⲃⲱⲗ.
Pour la suffixation, voir 255.
L'infinitif simple donne avec ϫⲓⲛ deux formes:
1. une forme qui n'exprime pas le sujet: ⲡϫⲓⲛ-ⲃⲱⲗ.
2. une autre forme toujours accompagnée du sujet: ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ, ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧ⸗ ⲃⲱⲗ.
Avec les suffixes:
| Sg. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲁ | 1. | ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉⲕ | 2. | ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ |
| f. | ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉϥ | 3. | ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉⲥ | ||
Devant un nom: ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ-
2. Syntaxe.
De même que le maṣdar arabe, le substantif verbal copte, dans ses quatre formes différentes, peut avoir un complément direct:
ⲫⲛⲁϩⲙⲉ-ⲧ «mon salut (litt. le sauver moi)»[1].
ⲟⲩ-ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ ⲫϯ «la connaissance de Dieu (litt. le connaître Dieu)»[2].
ⲡϫⲓⲛ-ⲑⲣⲉϥ-ϩⲉϫϩⲱϫ-ⲧ «l'oppression qu'il exerce sur moi»[3].
a. Substantif verbal avec la forme de l'infinitif simple ⲡⲓ-ⲃⲱⲗ.
Sous cette forme le substantif verbal, seul ou avec son complément, peut remplir toutes les fonctions d'un substantif ordinaire, c.-à-d. être sujet ou régime dans une proposition; il prend l'article défini ou ses dérivés:
ⲡⲁ-ⲁⲙⲟⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧ ⲟⲩ-ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲟⲧϥ ⲡⲉ «ma patience vient de lui (litt. mon contenir moi-même)»[1].
ⲁⲩⲟⲩⲃⲁϣ ⲉ ⲡ-ⲟⲥϧ-ⲟⲩ «ils ont blanchi pour la moisson (litt. pour le moissonner eux)»[2].
ⲁⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ϯⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ ⲡⲓϣϣⲏⲛ ⲉ ⲫ-ⲟⲩⲱⲙ «la femme vit que le fruit était bon à manger»[3].
Il est certains thèmes verbaux qui sont employés comme de simples substantifs, soit en gardant la forme de l'infinitif absolu: ⲱⲛϧ «vivre», ⲡⲓ-ⲱⲛϧ «la vie»; ⲥⲁϫⲓ «parler», ⲡⲓ-ⲥⲁϫⲓ «la parole»; soit en prenant celle du qualitatif: ϣⲟⲛⲧ «querelle» de ϣⲱⲛⲧ, qual. ϣⲟⲛⲧ «entrelacer»; ⲣⲟⲕϩ «bois de chauffage» de ⲣⲱⲕϩ, qual. ⲣⲟⲕϩ «brûler»; ⲫⲟⲧϩ «ouvrage de sculpture» de ⲫⲱⲧϩ, qual. ⲫⲟⲧϩ «sculpter»; ϫⲉⲗϫⲱⲗ «dessèchement»[4] de ϫⲟⲗϫⲉⲗ «faire sécher» dont le qualitatif devrait être ϫⲉⲗϫⲱⲗ (cf. A B, p. 39).
Le substantif verbal s'emploie avec l'article indéfini ⲟⲩ dans deux cas:
1. Après la préposition ϧⲉⲛ pour former une locution adverbiale:
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲥⲱⲟⲩⲧⲉⲛ «avec droiture, directement»,
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «entièrement»,
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϩⲱⲡ «en secret».
2. Après le verbe lui-même pour en appuyer le sens, comme le complément absolu arabe (مغمول مُطْلَق):
ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲙⲟⲩ ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲟⲩ موتَا تموتون «vous mourrez de mort»[5].
ⲁϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲉϥⲉⲛϣⲁϣⲓ بكى بكىاءً مرًّا «il pleura amèrement»[1].
ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ ⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲯⲩⲭⲏ «sauve-toi toi-même»[2].
Lorsque le substantif verbal est complément circonstantiel, on emploie surtout la forme avec ϫⲓⲛ.
b. Substantif verbal avec ϫⲓⲛ.
Le substantif verbal formé de ϫⲓⲛ ne peut remplir que la fonction de complément circonstantiel; il est donc toujours précédé d'une préposition.
Quant à la différence entre les trois formes ⲡϫⲓⲛ-ⲃⲱⲗ, ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ, ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ, on peut faire les remarques suivantes.
1. ⲡϫⲓⲛ-ⲃⲱⲗ.
Cette forme est employée:
1. Lorsque le sujet auquel est attribuée l'action du substantif verbal est le même que celui du verbe principal:
ⲛⲁⲩⲕⲱϯ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲟⲩⲙⲉⲧⲙⲉⲑⲣⲉ ϧⲁ ⲓ︤ⲏ︦ⲥ︥ ⲉⲡϫⲓⲛ-ϧⲟⲑⲃⲉϥ «ils cherchaient un témoignage contre Jésus pour le mettre à mort»[3].
2. Lorsque le substantif verbal n'a pas un sujet déterminé et qu'il représente plutôt un nom suivi d'un complément déterminatif:
ⲁⲥϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲥⲟϫⲉⲛ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲥⲱⲙⲁ ⲉ-ⲡϫⲓⲛ-ⲕⲟⲥⲧ «elle a répandu ce parfum sur mon corps pour ma sépulture»[4].
ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲓⲥ ⲁⲇⲁⲙ ⲁϥⲉⲣ ⲙ̀ⲫⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲉ-ⲡϫⲓⲛⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲡⲉⲑⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩⲡⲉⲧϩⲱⲟⲩ «voici qu'Adam est devenu semblable à l'un de nous pour la connaissance du bien et du mal»[1].
3. A l'exclusion des deux autres, cette forme est généralement employée sans complément comme un simple substantif; elle peut alors recevoir l'adjectif possessif et l'article du féminin (143):
ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲡⲉϥⲉⲙⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲡⲉϥ-ϫⲓⲛ-ⲉⲣⲟⲩⲱ «au sujet de son savoir et de ses réponses»[2].
ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲧⲉϫⲓⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ «à cause de ta parole»[3].
ϯ-ϫⲓⲛ-ⲥⲁϫⲓ «la conversation»[4].
ⲧⲉϥϫⲓⲛⲉⲣϩⲱⲃ «sa manière d'agir»[5].
2. ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ, ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉ- ⲃⲱⲗ.
En tenant compte du sens primitif, ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉ- ne devrait s'employer que dans le sens causatif, et ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ- dans le sens ordinaire; mais, dans l'état actuel de la langue, il n'y a entre ces deux formes aucune différence notable de sens. Il importe seulement de remarquer que ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉ- est beaucoup plus employé que ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ-.
Par opposition à ⲡϫⲓⲛ-ⲃⲱⲗ, ces deux formes s'emploient pour exprimer le sujet du substantif verbal quand il est différent de celui du verbe principal, ou qu'on veut le mettre en évidence. Elles vont surtout avec les deux prépositions ⲉ et ϧⲉⲛ:
ⲁⲡⲓⲡ︤ⲛ︦ⲁ︥ ⲟⲗϥ ⲉ ⲡϣⲁϥⲉ ⲉ ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ ⲡⲓⲇⲓⲁⲃⲟⲗⲟⲥ ⲉⲣⲡⲓⲣⲁⲍⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «l'Esprit le conduisit au désert pour qu'il fût tenté par le diable»[6].
Je vous ai tirés d'Egypte ⲉ ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛⲏⲓ «pour que vous soyez à moi»[1].
Avec ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉ-, ϧⲉⲛ indique une action qui se fait en même temps que celle du verbe principal et se traduit par «lorsque, pendant que»:
ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲫϯ ⲉ ⲧⲁⲡⲣⲟⲥⲉⲩⲭⲏ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲁⲧⲱⲃϩ «ô Dieu, écoute ma demande lorsque je prie»[2].
ϧⲉⲛ ⲡϫⲓⲛⲧⲉⲕⲱⲥϧ «lorsque tu moissonnes»[3].
Avec ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉ-, ϧⲉⲛ indique généralement une action qui a précédé immédiatement celle du verbe principal; plus rarement, une action simultanée:
ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲇⲉ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲡⲁⲗⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲁⲃⲣⲁⲁⲙ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲁϥⲟⲩⲱϣⲧ ⲙ̀ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ «il arriva que, lorsque le serviteur d'Abraham eut entendu ces paroles, il adora le Seigneur»[4].
ϧⲉⲛ ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲥⲟⲛ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲛⲁⲓ ⲁϥⲣⲁϣⲓ ⲉⲙⲁϣⲱ «lorsque le frère eut entendu ces choses, il se réjouit beaucoup»[5].
ϧⲉⲛ ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲟⲩϩⲉϫϩⲉϫ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ «lorsqu'ils vous oppriment»[6].
Cette tournure est assez fréquente dans les narrations, au commencement des phrases:
ⲟⲩⲟϩ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡϫⲓⲛⲑⲣⲉⲛⲧⲁϩⲟ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲛⲁϩϯ ⲉⲣⲁⲧϥ … ⲁ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲭⲁⲛ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «lorsque nous eûmes établi la foi, le roi nous laissa partir»[7].
VII. Passif du Verbe.
Le verbe copte n'a point de forme particulière pour le passif. On y supplée de différentes manières:
1. Le moyen général et ordinaire d'exprimer le passif consiste à employer la 3e pers. du pluriel actif:
ⲉⲩⲉⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ ϫⲉ ⲕⲉⲫⲁ «tu seras appelé (ils t'appelleront) Céphas»[1].
Le sujet apparent du verbe devient régime et le sujet réel est introduit par ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ:
ⲟⲩ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲁⲩⲟⲩⲟⲣⲡϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲫϯ «un homme qui était envoyé de Dieu»[2].
ⲟⲩ-ⲕⲁϣ ⲉⲩⲕⲓⲙ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩ-ⲑⲏⲟⲩ «un roseau agité par le vent»[3].
2. Quelques verbes forment leur passif au moyen du verbe préfixe ϭⲓ- «prendre»:
ϭⲓⲥⲙⲟⲩ «être béni»;
ϭⲓⲱⲟⲩ «être glorifié»;
ϭⲓⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ «être illuminé»;
ϭⲓⲱⲙⲥ «être baptisé».
L'infinitif des verbes transitifs peut en un certain sens exprimer le passif dont le sujet réel n'est pas mentionné (192).
ⲁⲩⲟⲩⲱⲛ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲛⲓⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛⲓⲥⲛⲁⲩϩ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ ⲁⲩⲃⲱⲗ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ «toutes les portes s'ouvrirent et tous les liens se délièrent»[4].
3. Le qualitatif de tous les verbes transitifs a le sens passif, mais il indique un état et non une action (200).
ϯϩⲉϫϩⲱϫ «je suis oppressé», ⲥⲥϧⲏⲟⲩⲧ «il est écrit».
VIII. Complément Direct du Verbe.
La syntaxe du complément direct est différente selon que le verbe est à l'état absolu, à l'état construit ou à l'état pronominal.
1. Complément direct du verbe à l'état absolu.
Le complément direct de tout verbe à l'état absolu est précédé de ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ devant ⲃ ⲙ ⲡ ⲫ ⲯ):
ⲥⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲥⲙⲏ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϣⲉⲙⲙⲟ «ils ne connaissent pas la voix de l'étranger»[1].
ⲫⲓⲱⲧ ⲙⲉⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ «le Père aime le Fils»[2].
Quand le complément est un pronom, on emploie ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗:
ⲉϣⲱⲡ ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲙⲉⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ «si vous m'aimez»[3].
Les verbes grecs actifs se construisent toujours de cette manière, car ils ne peuvent être ni à l'état construit ni à l'état pronominal:
ϩⲓⲛⲁ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲉⲣⲡⲓⲣⲁⲍⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ «pour vous éprouver»[4].
Remarques.
1. Le verbe ϫⲱ ϫⲟ⸗ «dire» exige toujours un nom ou un pronom pour complément direct; si la phrase n'en contient pas, on le remplace par le pronom neutre ⲥ avec ϫⲟ⸗, par ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ avec ϫⲱ:
ⲉⲩϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ «disant»;
ⲁⲩϫⲟⲥ «on a dit».
2. Lorsque le verbe ⲭⲱ ⲭⲁ⸗ «laisser» et l'impératif ⲙⲟⲓ ⲙⲏⲓ⸗ «accorde» ont pour régime toute une proposition, on emploie la forme neutre ⲭⲁⲥ, ⲙⲏⲓⲥ:
ⲭⲁⲥ ⲛ̀ϣⲟⲣⲡ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩⲥⲓ ⲛ̀ϫⲉ ⲛⲓϣⲏⲣⲓ «laisse d'abord les enfants se rassasier»[1].
ⲙⲏⲓⲥ ⲉⲑⲣⲟⲩϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲛⲁⲛ «accorde qu'ils soient à nous»[2].
3. L'attribut du verbe ϣⲱⲡⲓ «être» est généralement précédé du qualitatif ⲟⲓ (218), au 3e présent; si c'est un verbe, il se met lui-même au 3e présent:
ϯⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲁⲛ ⲉⲓⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ⲁⲣⲭⲏⲅⲟⲥ «je ne serai pas chef»[3].
ϩⲓⲛⲁ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲕⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲃⲁϩⲓ «afin que tu vives longtemps ( litt. afin que tu sois possesseur d'âge)»[4].
ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲉⲃⲧⲱⲧ «soyez prêts»[5].
ϯⲛⲁϣϣⲉ ⲉⲙⲁⲩ ⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲓⲣⲁϧⲧ ⲉϧⲣⲏⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲓⲙⲱⲓⲧ «je n'irai pas là-bas de peur d'être étendu sur le chemin»[6].
4. Lorsque ⲛ se trouve devant l'article indéfini ⲟⲩ, on le redouble parfois et l'on obtient ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩ-, qu'il faut se garder de confondre avec l'adjectif possessif:
ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩϣⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ «ils ne pourront délivrer un homme»[7].
2. Complément direct du verbe à l'état construit.
Le complément direct de tout verbe a l'état construit s'unit par lui-même et sans particule à son verbe:
ⲁ ⲫϯ ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ ⲡⲓⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ «Dieu a aimé le monde»[8].
ⲁϥϫⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ «il dit ces choses».
Dans les manuscrits, le complément direct de la forme abrégée est souvent écrit avec le verbe, comme s'il ne formait avec lui qu'un seul mot composé.
Dans quelques livres, il est uni au verbe par un trait d'union.
3. Complément direct du verbe à l'état pronominal.
Dans ce cas, le complément étant toujours un pronom suffixe, sa syntaxe consiste à appliquer les règles de la suffixation.
Nous donnons d'abord deux modèles généraux qui conviennent au plus grand nombre des verbes.
Nous indiquons ensuite les particularités et exceptions.
Verbe terminé par les voyelles ⲟ, ⲱ.
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲧⲁⲙⲟⲓ | 1. | ⲧⲁⲙⲟⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲧⲁⲙⲟⲕ | 2. | ⲧⲁⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ ou ⲧⲁⲙⲉ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲧⲁⲙⲟ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲧⲁⲙⲟϥ | 3. | ⲧⲁⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲧⲁⲙⲟⲥ | ||
Verbe terminé par une cons.
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲃⲟⲗⲧ | 1. | ⲃⲟⲗⲧⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲃⲟⲗⲕ | 2. | ⲃⲉⲗ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲃⲟⲗⲓ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲃⲟⲗϥ | 3. | ⲃⲟⲗⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲃⲟⲗⲥ | ||
Règles et remarques.
I. La 1 sing. est en ⲓ après ⲟ ⲱ, en ⲧ après une consonne.
1. Les quelques verbes qui sont terminés en ⲁ⸗ ou ⲓ⸗ prennent ⲧ:
ⲭⲁ⸗ ⲭⲁⲧ;
ⲁⲓ⸗ ⲁⲓⲧ[1];
ⲧⲏⲓ⸗ ⲧⲏⲓⲧ[2].
2. Lorsque l'infinitif est déjà terminé par un ⲧ, on n'ajoute pas toujours un autre ⲧ, mais il est toujours permis de l'ajouter.
ϭⲓⲧ[1] et ϭⲓⲧⲧ[2] de ϭⲓ ϭⲓⲧ⸗ «prendre»;
ϩⲓⲧ[3] et ϩⲓⲧⲧ[4] de ϩⲓⲟⲩⲓ ϩⲓⲧ⸗ «jeter».
Mais on trouve toujours ⲕⲟⲧⲧ, ⲥⲟⲧⲧ, ϥⲓⲧⲧ.
3. Les verbes terminés par ⲃ ⲙ ⲛ précédés d'une consonne prennent la voyelle auxiliaire ⲉ avant l'adjonction des suffixes, excepté à la 2 f. sg. et à la 2 et 5 pl.
De ⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ ⲛⲁϩⲙ⸗ «délivrer», on a:
| Sing. | Pl. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | ⲛⲁϩⲙⲉⲧ | 1. | ⲛⲁϩⲙⲉⲛ |
| 2 m. | ⲛⲁϩⲙⲉⲕ | 2. | ⲛⲁϩⲉⲙ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲛⲁϩⲙⲓ | ||
| 3 m. | ⲛⲁϩⲙⲉϥ | 3. | ⲛⲁϩⲙⲟⲩ |
| f. | ⲛⲁϩⲙⲉⲥ | ||
II. La 2 sg. f. ne prend rien après les voyelles ⲟ ⲱ; elle prend ⲓ après une consonne.
1. Les verbes en ⲁ⸗ ⲓ⸗ ajoutent ⲓ à la 1 sg., ce qui donne ϯ:
ⲭⲁ⸗ ⲭⲁϯ,
ⲁⲓ⸗ ⲁⲓϯ,
ⲧⲏⲓ⸗ ⲧⲏⲓϯ.
2. Après une consonne on trouve aussi ϯ au lieu de ⲓ:
ⲙⲟⲣϯ et ⲙⲟⲣⲓ[5] de ⲙⲟⲩⲣ ⲙⲟⲣ⸗ «lier»;
ϫⲟⲣϯ[6] de ϫⲱⲣ ϫⲟⲣ⸗ «dissiper»;
ⲟⲩⲟⲙϯ[7] de ⲟⲩⲱⲙ ⲟⲩⲟⲙ⸗ «manger»;
ⲫⲁⲥϯ[8] de ⲫⲓⲥⲓ ⲫⲁⲥ⸗ «faire cuire»;
ⲥⲟⲧϯ[9] de ⲥⲱϯ ⲥⲟⲧ⸗ «sauver».
III. La 1 pl. prend ⲛ après une voyelle; après une consonne on emploie plus généralement ⲧⲉⲛ, mais souvent aussi ⲉⲛ. Quelquefois le même verbe a les deux formes:
ⲥⲟⲧⲡⲉⲛ[1] de ⲥⲱⲧⲡ «choisir»;
ⲟⲡⲧⲉⲛ de ⲱⲡ «compter»;
ⲟⲗⲧⲉⲛ et ⲟⲗⲉⲛ[2] de ⲱⲗⲓ «enlever»;
ⲗⲟϫⲧⲉⲛ et ⲗⲟϫⲉⲛ[3] de ⲗⲱϫⲓ «cesser».
Les verbes terminés par ⲧ prennent ⲧⲉⲛ:
ϩⲓⲧ-ⲧⲉⲛ, ⲥⲟⲧ-ⲧⲉⲛ, ⲕⲟⲧ-ⲧⲉⲛ, ϣⲁⲧ-ⲧⲉⲛ, ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ-ⲧⲉⲛ.
On trouve une fois ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ[4].
Les verbes terminés par ⲓ⸗ qui prennent ⲧ à la 1 sg. le gardent à la 1 pl.: ⲁⲓⲧⲉⲛ.
IV. La 2 pl. peut toujours se former en ajoutant ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ à l'infinitif construit.
Cette formation est de règle pour les verbes terminés par une consonne, et cela afin de distinguer la 1 pl. de la 2 pl.; elle semble libre pour les autres verbes:
ⲕⲉⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ «convertissez-vous»;
ⲁϥⲧⲁⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ «il vous a informés».
V. La 3 pl. est toujours en ⲟⲩ. Après ⲁ, ⲟⲩ se contracte en ⲩ: ⲭⲁ⸗ ⲭⲁⲩ, ⲓⲁ⸗ ⲓⲁⲩ.
On intercale parfois un ⲧ euphonique entre le radical et ⲟⲩ: ϫⲟⲧⲟⲩ de ϫⲱ ϫⲟ⸗ «dire».
Les verbes terminés par ⲓ⸗ qui prennent ⲧ à la 1 sg. le gardent devant ⲟⲩ:
ⲁⲓⲧⲟⲩ, ⲙⲏⲓⲧⲟⲩ, ⲧⲏⲓⲧⲟⲩ.
Remarques.
Aux deux dernières personnes du pluriel, ⲟ se change en ⲱ devant ⲧⲉⲛ et ⲟⲩ.
4. Verbes employés dans le sens réfléchi.
Plusieurs verbes coptes se conjuguent avec deux pronoms de la même personne, dont l'un est sujet et l'autre régime, absolument comme en français «se lever, se reposer» etc.: ⲁϥ-ⲧⲱⲛ-ϥ «il se leva».
Le second pronom peut être régime direct ou indirect, selon que le verbe est transitif ou intransitif.
a. Verbes transitifs.
Tous les verbes transitifs pourraient être employés dans le sens réfléchi comme en français «s'aimer, se louer». Mais en copte ce sens est attaché à l'infinitif lui-même sans le secours d'un second pronom (192).
Il n'y a qu'un certain nombre de verbes qui admettent comme régime direct un pronom de la même personne. Les plus employés sont: ⲧⲱⲛ⸗ «se lever» qui devient ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ⸗ à la 3 pl: ⲁⲩ-ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ-ⲟⲩ «ils se levèrent».
ⲕⲟⲧ⸗ «s'en retourner, revenir»,
ⲗⲟϫ⸗ «se relever, guérir»,
ⲟⲩⲁϩ⸗ ⲉ «(s'ajouter à) suivre»,
ⲟⲩⲁϩⲙ⸗ «se remettre à»,
ⲟⲩⲟⲛϩ⸗ «se montrer, apparaître»,
ⲣⲟⲑⲃ⸗ «se mettre à table»,
ⲥⲁϩⲱ⸗ «s'éloigner»,
ⲧⲁⲗⲟ⸗ «monter»,
ⲧⲁⲥⲑⲟ⸗ «revenir»,
ⲧⲉⲛⲑⲱⲛ⸗ «ressembler à»,
ⲧⲟⲙ⸗ «s'attacher à»,
ϥⲟϫ⸗ «s'élancer»,
ϩⲉⲛ⸗ «se mouvoir»,
ϫⲉⲙ⸗ «se trouver».
Ajoutez deux verbes composés: ⲟⲩⲁϩ-ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ «se remettre à», ⲭⲁ-ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ «se décourager».
Les verbes ⲙ̀ⲧⲟⲛ qual. ⲙⲟⲧⲉⲛ «se reposer», ⲓⲏⲥ «se hâter», ⲭⲱⲗⲉⲙ «se hâter», ⲟⲩⲛⲟϥ «se réjouir», exigent ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗: ⲁϥⲙ̀ⲧⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «il se reposa»; ⲓⲏⲥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲕ «hâte-toi»; ⲁϥⲭⲱⲗⲉⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ «il se hâta»; ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲛⲟⲩⲛⲟϥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ «réjouissons-nous».
b. Verbes intransitifs.
Les quelques verbes qui, avec une préposition, ont un sens réfléchi sont:
ϣⲉ ⲛ⸗ «s'en aller»: ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ «il s'en alla», ⲁⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲩ «ils s'en allèrent».
La même construction peut avoir lieu avec les verbes grecs qui signifient «partir»: ⲁϥⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉ ⲉⲣⲁⲛⲁⲭⲱⲣⲓⲛ ⲛⲁϥ «il voulut s'en aller»[1].
ⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ «sembler»: ⲁⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ «il me sembla»[2].
ϥⲁⲓ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ «se contenir»: ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϣϥⲁⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ «il ne put se contenir»[3].
ⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗ «se tenir debout»: ⲁⲥⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧⲥ «elle s'est tenue debout».
5. Remarques sur quelques verbes.
ⲣⲁⲛⲉ- ⲣⲁⲛ⸗ «plaire à».
Ce verbe, composé de ⲉⲣ- et de la même racine que ⲁⲛⲁⲓ «être bon», n'a pas de forme absolue; il est toujours suivi d'un régime, nom ou pronom suffixe:
ⲁ ⲡⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲣⲁⲛⲉ-ⲫⲁⲣⲁⲱ «le discours plut à Pharaon»[1].
ⲁⲥⲣⲁⲛⲏⲓ «il m'a plu»[2].
Lorsque le régime est un nom, on emploie généralement la forme avec suffixe et on fait suivre le nom au moyen de ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀):
ⲁⲩⲣⲁⲛⲁϥ ⲙ̀ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ «ils ont plu au Seigneur»[3].
ⲕⲏⲛ, ⲟⲩⲱ «cesser de».
Ces deux verbes présentent deux sens:
1. «Cesser de», avec un verbe au 3e présent:
ⲁϥⲕⲏⲛ ⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ[4], ⲁϥⲟⲩⲱ ⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ[5] «il cessa de parler».
ⲁⲥⲧⲥⲟϥ ϣⲁⲧⲉϥⲟⲩⲱ ⲉϥⲥⲱ «elle lui versa jusqu'à ce qu'il eût cessé de boire»[6].
Le verbe ⲗⲱϫⲓ ⲗⲟϫ⸗ s'emploie aussi dans ce sens:
ⲁⲩⲗⲟϫⲟⲩ ⲉⲩⲕⲱⲧ «ils cessèrent de construire»[7].
Une construction semblable du verbe composé ϫⲉⲕ-ⲧⲟⲧ⸗ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ signifie «achever de»: ⲁϥϫⲉⲕⲧⲟⲧϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉϥⲥϧⲁⲓ «il acheva d'écrire»[8].
2. «Déjà» au parfait, avec un verbe au même temps, au 3 e présent ou à l'infinitif avec ⲉ:
ⲁⲥⲟⲩⲱ ⲁⲥⲓ̀ «elle est déjà venue»[9].
ⲁⲩⲕⲏⲛ ⲉⲩϭⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲟⲩⲃⲉⲭⲉ «ils ont déjà reçu leur récompense»[10].
ⲁ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲕⲏⲛ ⲉ ⲥϧⲁⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕⲣⲁⲛ «mon père a déjà écrit ton nom»[11].
ⲁⲩⲟⲩⲱ ⲉⲩϯϩⲁⲡ ⲉⲣⲟϥ «il est déjà jugé»[12].
ⲟⲩⲁϩⲧⲟⲧ⸗, ⲟⲩⲁϩⲙ⸗ «se remettre à».
ⲟⲩⲁϩⲧⲟⲧ⸗ peut être suivi du 1 er parfait lorsqu'il est lui-même à ce temps; partout ailleurs il est accompagné de l'infinitif avec ⲉ. Il peut se traduire par «de nouveau, encore, en outre»:
ⲁⲥⲟⲩⲁϩⲧⲟⲧⲥ ⲁⲥⲙⲓⲥⲓ عادت وولدت «elle enfanta de nouveau»[1].
ⲛ̀ⲛⲟⲩⲟⲩⲁϩⲧⲟⲧⲟⲩ ⲉ ⲓⲣⲓ ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲁⲓϩⲱⲃ «ils n'agiront plus de cette manière»[2].
ⲟⲩⲁϩⲙ⸗ est suivi du 3e présent et signifie «faire de nouveau»:
ⲁϥⲟⲩⲁϩⲙⲉϥ ⲉϥϫⲟⲥ «il dit de nouveau».
12.1 The relative form of the First Perfect. When the First Perfect is used in relative clauses, it combines with the relative pronoun into a single unit.
| ⲉⲧⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | which I heard |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧⲁ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
These forms are very frequently spelled with ⲛ̀ for initial ⲉⲛ-, as <ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓ->, <ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕ->, etc.
The relative pronoun ⲉⲧ- of the preceding paradigm and ⲉⲧ, which was introduced in §3.1, cannot be preceded directly by prepositions or direct object markers. The real syntactic function of the relative pronoun within the relative clause must be expressed by a resumptive pronoun. The general construction is most clearly understood by"Copticizing" a few English examples:
| the man who went → |
| the man who he went |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the man whom I saw → |
| the man who I saw him |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲁⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ |
| the man to whom I gave the money → |
| the man who I gave the money to him |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲁⲓϯ-ⲡϩⲁⲧ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the boat into which we climbed → |
| the boat which we climbed into it |
| ⲡϫⲟⲓ ⲉⲧⲁⲛⲁⲗⲏⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ |
| the sound which they heard → |
| the sound which they heard it |
| ⲡϧⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟϥ |
This use of resumptive pronouns is required in Coptic in all but a few instances which will be mentioned later on. Similar constructions with ⲉⲧ will be treated in Lesson 19.
When a relative clause contains more than one verb, the relative pronoun need not be repeated:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| the man who arose and left |
12.2 The relative pronoun has the form ⲉⲧⲉ before the negative First Perfect:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲫⲱⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| the man who did not flee |
| ⲛϫⲱⲙ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| the books which he did not find |
12.3 As mentioned in §3.1, all relative clauses in Coptic may be substantivized by prefixing the appropriate form of the definite article. Resumptive pronouns are required. Study the following examples carefully:
| the one who (or: he who) went |
| ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ |
| the one (m.) whom they sent |
| ⲡⲉⲛⲧⲁⲩ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| the one (m.) to whom I gave the money |
| ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓϯ-ⲡϩⲁⲧ ⲛⲁϥ |
| that (m.) which I took from you |
| ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓϭⲓⲧϥ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧⲕ |
| those who took it (m.) |
| ⲛⲉⲧⲁⲩϭⲓⲧϥ |
| the one (f.) whom they entrusted to us |
| ⲧⲉⲧⲁⲩⲧⲏⲓⲥ ⲉⲧⲟⲧⲛ |
12.4 Infinitives (cont.). With the exception of the verbs treated in §9.2, monosyllabic infinitives of the pattern consonant + vowel are relatively uncommon and do not constitute any sort of unified class. Some of these verbs are very important, however, and their forms should be learned:
| ⲥⲱ | ⲥⲉ- | ⲥⲟ⸗ | to drink |
| ⲭⲱ | ⲭⲁ- | ⲭⲁ⸗ | to put, place |
| ⲓⲱ | ⲓⲁ- | ⲓⲁ⸗ | to wash |
| ϫⲱ | ϫⲉ- | ϫⲟ⸗ | to say |
| ⲙⲉⲓ | ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ- | ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ⸗ | to love |
Some verbs of this type are intransitive and do not take direct objects: e.g. ⲙⲟⲩ (to die), ⲛⲁⲓ (to pity), ϣⲁⲓ (to rise: of the sun etc.), ϩⲉⲓ (to fall), <ϭⲱ> (to remain).
12.5 When introducing a direct quotation, the verb ϫⲱ requires a "dummy" object (it: ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ, -ⲥ) followed by the conjunction ϫⲉ, as in
| ⲁϥϫⲟⲥ ϫⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ. |
| He said, "I have not seen him." |
With this particular verb the alternate object form ϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ is not permitted in the First Perfect. ϫⲱ may, of course, have a real direct object otherwise:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϫⲉ-ⲛⲏⲓ. |
| I did not say these things. |
13.1 The Temporal. A special conjugation is used to express a subordinate temporal clause (English "when" with a simple past or pluperfect verb), as in
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ, ⲁⲓⲡⲱⲧ ϣⲁⲣⲟϥ. |
| When I saw him, I ran to him. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥϫⲱⲕ ⲙ̄ ⲡⲉϥϩⲱⲃ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲁϥⲃⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| When he had completed his work, he left. |
The full inflection of this form, called the Temporal Conjugation, is as follows:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | when I heard |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | etc. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲧⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲉ ⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ | |
| when the man heard |
Alternate spellings, such as ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲓ-, ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲕ̄-, ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣϥ̄-, are common.
The Temporal is negated by prefixing -ⲧⲙ̄- to the infinitive:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲧⲙ̄ϭⲓⲛⲉ ⲙ̄ⲙⲟϥ |
| when I did not find him |
With a nominal subject, -ⲧⲙ̄- usually remains with the verbal prefix:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉⲧⲙ̄-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲉ ⲟⲩⲱϣⲃ̄ |
| when the man did not answer |
A Temporal clause usually stands before the main clause, but occurrences after the main clause are not rare:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥϣⲁϫⲉ, ⲁⲓⲣⲓⲙⲉ. |
| ⲁⲓⲣⲓⲙⲉ ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥϣⲁϫⲉ. |
| I wept when I heard his words. |
When a Temporal clause is continued with a second verb, the Temporal prefix is not repeated and the First Perfect is used:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲙ̄ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϩⲣⲟⲟⲩ ⲁⲩⲱ ⲁⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϩⲟ… |
| when I heard his voice and saw his face… |
13.2 Relative clauses with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ. Contrast the two sentences:
| ⲁ-ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| My father left me there. |
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| It was my father who left me there. |
The second sentence, known in English as a type of cleft sentence ("it was … that/who …"), singles out the subject ("my father and no one else") as the actor, while the first sentence merely describes a past action with no special emphasis. The Coptic correspondent of the English cleft sentence employs ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ followed by the relative form of the verb. ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ usually combine with the relative form to produce ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓ-, ⲛⲉⲧⲁⲕ-, etc.:
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
This form should not be confused with the nominalized relative ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ etc., which consists of the definite article plus the relative form (see §12.3). Contrast
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̄ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| It was my father who left me there. |
| ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| My father is the one who left me there. |
The second sentence is a normal ⲡⲉ sentence: ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ is the subject, ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲭⲁⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ is the predicate.
The cleft sentence with ⲡⲉ is a favorite one with the interrogative pronouns:
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲕ? |
| Who sent you? |
| Who was it that sent you? |
| ⲟⲩ ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲕⲧⲏⲓϥ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ? |
| What did you give to them? |
| What was it that you gave to them? |
Note that in this case the English cleft sentence pattern ("who was it that") is slightly different from the one given above.
13.3 The preposition ⲉ is used before an infinitive to express purpose:
| ⲁⲓⲓ ⲉ ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲕ. |
| I have come to speak with you. |
The subject of the infinitive in this construction is usually the same as that of the main verb, but some laxness occurs, as in
| ⲁϥ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ⲉ ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲕ. |
| He sent me to speak with you. |
13.4 Coptic has no real passive conjugations. The passive is expressed by using the 3rd pers. pl. of the active form in an indefinite sense:
| ⲁⲩ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ϣⲁⲣⲟⲕ. |
| I have been sent to you. |
That such expressions are to be taken in a passive sense is most evident (1) when there is no clear reference for the pronoun "they", or (2) when an agent is added, usually with ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ, as in
| ⲁⲩ<ⲧⲛⲛⲟⲟⲩ> ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲓⲧⲉⲛ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ. |
| I have been sent by the king. |
13.5 Infinitives (continued). Transitive infinitives of the pattern ⲕⲱⲧ have the following forms:
| ⲕⲱⲧ | ⲕⲉⲧ- | ⲕⲟⲧ⸗ | to build |
| ϫⲱⲕ | ϫⲉⲕ- | ϫⲟⲕ⸗ | to complete |
| ϩⲱⲡ | ϩⲉⲡ- | ϩⲟⲡ⸗ | to hide, to conceal |
| ⲱⲡ | ⲉⲡ- | ⲟⲡ⸗ | to count |
Transitive verbs of this pattern are quite common.
14.1 The Second Perfect. As we shall see in subsequent lessons, each "first" tense in Coptic has a counterpart called a second tense, the use of which places a special emphasis on some element of the sentence other than the verb, usually an adverbial phrase. Contrast the following:
First Perfect:
| ⲁ-ⲫⲁⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲕ. |
| This happened because of you. |
Second Perfect:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲫⲁⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲕ. |
| It was because of you that this happened. |
As our translation indicates, the English cleft sentence is a handy way to render Coptic sentences with second tense verbal forms. Except for the special uses taken up below, the use of a second tense is not obligatory but depends on what the writer chooses to emphasize.
The Second Perfect has the same inflectional forms as the Relative of the First Perfect, but usually without the initial ⲉ: ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, etc.
When phrases containing interrogative pronouns or adverbs are placed after the verb, a second tense is regularly used, but exceptions are not rare:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲟⲩ? |
| Why did you send him? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲑⲁⲓⲉⲡⲓⲥⲧⲟⲗⲏ ⲉ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| To whom did he bring this letter? |
But if the interrogative phrase is placed first, as is usually the case with ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲟⲩ, the first tense is used:
| ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲟⲩ ⲁⲕⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ? |
14.2 Further remarks on interrogative pronouns and adverbs. The interrogative pronouns ⲛⲓⲙ (who?) and ⲟⲩ (what?) may be used as subjects or objects of verbs and as objects of prepositions. When they are used as the subject of a verb, the verb is normally in the second tense form:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲟⲩ ϣⲱⲡⲓ? |
| What happened? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲛⲓⲙ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ? |
| Who went in? |
Examples of object usage, again regularly with the second tense:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| Whom did you see? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲧⲏⲓϥ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| To whom did you give it? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲭⲁ-ⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ? |
| What did he put there? |
The construction introduced in §13.2 is used much more frequently than the preceding:
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ? |
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁⲕⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ? |
The interrogative adverbs ⲑⲱⲛ (where?), ⲉ ⲑⲱⲛ (whither?), ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲑⲱⲛ (whence?), and ⲛ̀ⲑⲛⲁⲩ (when?) occur regularly in post-verbal position with a second tense:
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉ ⲧⲱⲛ? |
| Where did your father go? |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲑⲛⲁⲩ? |
| When did they die? |
14.3 Infinitives (continued). In infinitives of the type ⲕⲱⲧ the ⲱ is modified to ⲟⲩ when the initial consonant is ⲙ or ⲛ:
| ⲙⲟⲩⲣ | ⲙⲉⲣ- | ⲙⲟⲣ⸗ | to bind |
| ⲙⲟⲩⲛ | — | — | to remain |
The ⲟ of the presuffixal form is regularly replaced by ⲁ before stem final ϩ and (usually) ϣ:
| ⲟⲩⲱϩ | ⲟⲩⲉϩ- | ⲟⲩⲁϩ⸗ | to put, place |
| ⲟⲩⲱϣ | ⲟⲩⲉϣ- | ⲟⲩⲁϣ⸗ | to want, desire |
| ⲙⲟϩ | ⲙⲁϩ- | ⲙⲁϩ⸗ | to fill |
15.1 Adjectives. Although there is some debate over the existence of adjectives as a grammatical category in Coptic, it is nevertheless convenient to retain the designation for the words treated in this lesson. Most attributive adjectives may either precede or follow the noun they modify, joined to the noun with a linking particle ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀). The noun and adjective form a close unit; any article, possessive adjective, or demonstrative stands before the whole unit:
| ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲙ̀ ⲃⲁⲕⲓ |
| ⲟⲩⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓϣϯ |
| a large city |
| ⲡⲁⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ ⲛ̀ ϣⲏⲣⲓ |
| ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ |
| my beloved son |
| ⲡⲥⲁⲃⲉ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲥⲁⲃⲉ |
| the wise man |
These examples represent the normal attributive adjective construction. There are, however, some restrictions on certain special groups of adjectives:
Some adjectives have distinct feminine and plural forms; e.g.
| masc. | fem. | pl. | |
|---|---|---|---|
| ⲭⲁⲙⲉ | ⲭⲁⲙⲏ | — | black |
| ϧⲁⲉ | ϧⲁⲏ | ϧⲁⲉⲩ | last |
| ⲥⲁⲃⲉ | ⲥⲁⲃⲏ | ⲥⲁⲃⲉⲩ | wise |
| ϭⲁⲗⲉ | — | ϭⲁⲗⲉⲩ | lame |
| ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲓⲧ | — | ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲁϯ | beloved |
| ϣⲟⲣⲡ | ϣⲟⲣⲡⲓ | — | first |
| ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ | ϩⲟⲩⲓϯ | ϩⲟⲩⲁϯ | first |
| ϣⲉⲙⲙⲟ | ϣⲙ̄ⲙⲱ | ϣⲉⲙⲙⲱⲟⲩ | alien, foreign |
The plurals in -ⲉⲉⲩⲉ also occur as -ⲉⲉⲩ. The fem. forms are used with sing. and plural fem. nouns. The plural forms occur mainly in substantivized usage:
| ⲛⲥⲁⲃⲉⲩ |
| the wise |
| ⲛϩⲟⲩⲁϯ |
| the elders, prominent persons (e.g. of a city) |
Greek adjectives may appear (1) in the Gk. masc. sing. form with nouns of either gender or number:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ |
| the good man |
| ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ |
| the good woman |
or (2) in the Gk. fem. sing. form if the modified noun refers to a female person:
| ⲧⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲅⲁⲑⲏ |
| the good woman |
or (3) in the Gk. neuter form with nouns of either gender if they denote non-humans:
| ⲧⲯⲩⲭⲏ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲉⲗⲉⲓⲟⲛ |
| the perfect spirit |
Greek substantivized neuter adjectives are treated as masculine in Coptic:
| ⲡⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲛ |
| good, that which is good (τὸ ἀγαθόν) |
A noun may be modified by more than one adjective, with various orders:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ϩⲏⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲇⲓⲕⲉⲟⲥ |
| the righteous poor man |
| ⲡⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲛ̀ ⲇⲓⲕⲉⲟⲥ |
| the great (and) righteous king |
All Coptic adjectives may be substantivized ("one who is…, that which is…") by prefixing the appropriate form of the article:
| ⲡⲉⲃⲓⲏⲛ |
| the poor man |
| ⲛⲉⲃⲓⲏⲛ |
| the poor (people) |
| ⲡⲁⲓϩⲏⲕⲓ |
| this poor man |
| ⲧⲁⲓϩⲏⲕⲓ |
| this poor woman |
| ⲟⲩⲥⲁⲃⲉ |
| a wise man |
| ϩⲁⲛⲥⲁⲃⲉⲩ |
| wise men |
When the first noun in a genitive construction is followed by an adjectival phrase, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ may optionally be used instead of ⲛ̀ for the genitive:
| ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ϭⲁⲗⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the man's crippled child |
15.2 Adjectives as predicates are treated exactly like noun predicates. Note the obligatory use of the indefinite article:
| ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ. |
| He is good. |
| ⲛ̀ ϩⲁⲛⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲁⲛ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are not good. |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲟⲩⲁⲅⲁⲑⲟⲥ ⲡⲉ. |
| The man is good. |
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ϩⲁⲛⲇⲓⲕⲉⲟⲥ ⲛⲉ. |
| The men are just. |
| ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲧⲉ ⲧⲁⲓⲃⲁⲕⲓ. |
| This city is large. |
15.3 The cardinal numbers from one to five are
| masc. | fem. | |
|---|---|---|
| one | ⲟⲩⲁⲓ | ⲟⲩⲓ |
| two | ⲥⲛⲁⲩ | ⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ |
| three | ϣⲟⲙⲧ | ϣⲟⲙϯ |
| four | ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ | ϥⲧⲟⲓ, ϥⲧⲟ |
| five | ϯⲟⲩ | ϯⲉ, ϯ |
The numbers from three upward stand before the noun with the adjectival ⲛ̀. The noun is in the singular form, as is the definite article when present:
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ϫⲟⲓ |
| three ships |
| ⲡϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲣⲟ |
| the three kings |
| ⲧⲁⲓϣⲟⲙϯ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ |
| these three years |
Note the absence of the indefinite article in the indefinite expressions.
The number one is construed in the same way, but the linking ⲛ̀ may be omitted:
| (ⲡ)ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| (ⲡ)ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| (the) one man |
The number two follows its noun, which is likewise in the singular; no ⲛ̀ is used:
| (ⲡ)ⲥⲟⲛ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ |
| (the) two brothers |
| (ⲧ)ⲥⲱⲛⲓ ⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ |
| (the) two sisters |
And the numbers given in the lesson.
16.1 The interrogative pronouns ⲁϣ, ⲟⲩ, and ⲛⲓⲙ may be used adjectivally. This usage is most frequent in certain fixed expressions, the most important of which are
ⲁϣ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲓⲛⲓ (of) what sort? This phrase is used attributively, as in
| ⲟⲩⲁϣ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ ϫⲟⲓ? |
| What sort of ship? |
or predicatively (note obligatory use of indefinite article):
| ⲟⲩⲁϣ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲓⲛⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲱⲙⲓ? |
| Of what sort is this man? |
ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲏϯ (of) what sort? ⲛ̀ ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲏϯ in what way? how?
| ⲟⲩⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲏϯ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲏⲓⲛⲓ? |
| Of what sort is this sign? |
| ⲛ̀ ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲏϯ ⲁⲕϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ? |
| How did you find him? |
Similar use of ⲟⲩ and ⲛⲓⲙ is rarer, e.g. ⲛⲓⲙ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ? what man? ⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲓⲛⲓ what sort? In special contexts these same or similar expressions may have an indefinite value: ⲛⲓⲙ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ such and such a person, ⲁϣ ⲛ̀ ϯⲙⲓ some village or other, ⲟⲩ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲟⲩ this and that.
16.2 "Each, every" is expressed by ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ placed after a singular noun with no article: ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ every man, everyone; ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ everything; ϯⲙⲓ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ every village. Pronominal resumption is usually in the plural:
| ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲉⲧⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ |
| everything which we heard |
| ϩⲱⲃ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲟⲛⲏⲣⲟⲛ ⲉⲧⲁϥⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| every evil thing that he did |
But resumption in the singular is not rare.
16.3 The indefinite pronouns are ⲟⲩⲟⲛ anyone; ϩⲗⲓ anyone, anything. These are most frequent in negative contexts as "no one, nothing":
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ. |
| I saw no one there. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϯ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲛⲏⲓ. |
| He gave me nothing. |
ϩⲗⲓ also appears with the indefinite article: ⲟⲩϩⲗⲓ.
ϩⲗⲓ is often used adjectively:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ. |
| No man saw me. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϣⲉⲡ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲛ̀ ϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲧϥ. |
| I received no book from him. |
When (ⲟⲩ)ϩⲗⲓ or phrases beginning with (ⲟⲩ)ϩⲗⲓ are direct objects of transitive verbs (i.e. object with ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗), the use of the prenominal form of the infinitive is obligatory in the First Perfect and its negative. Thus ⲙ̀ⲡⲓϣⲱⲡ ⲛ̀ ϩⲗⲓ… is not permitted in the sentence above.
As a nominal predicate ϩⲗⲓ means "nothing", even when no negative is formally involved. The indefinite article is obligatory:
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲟⲩϩⲗⲓ. |
| I am nothing. |
| ϩⲁⲛϩⲗⲓ ⲛⲉ ⲛⲉⲩⲛⲟⲩⲧⲉ. |
| Their gods are nothing. |
ⲛ̀ ϩⲗⲓ or ϩⲗⲓ alone may be used adverbially in the sense "(not) at all":
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ (ⲛ̀) ϩⲗⲓ. |
| I didn't speak with him at all. |
Note also the expression ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ everyone, everybody.
16.4 "All, the whole (of)" is expressed by ⲧⲏⲣ⸗ used in apposition to a preceding noun or pronoun. A resumptive suffix is required:
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ |
| all the men (lit. the men, all of them) |
| ⲡⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ ⲧⲏⲣϥ |
| the whole world, all the world |
| ⲁⲩⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ. |
| They all came in. |
The pronominal suffixes are the same as those used on prepositions and infinitives; the 2nd pers. pl. form is ⲧⲏⲣⲧⲉⲛ. The 3rd pers. pl. ⲧⲏⲣⲟⲩ may also be used for 2nd pers. pl. reference.
16.5 The numbers from six to ten:
| masc. | fem. | |
|---|---|---|
| six | ⲥⲟⲟⲩ | ⲥⲟ, ⲥⲟⲉ |
| seven | ϣⲁϣϥ | ϣⲁϣϥⲓ |
| eight | ϣⲙⲏⲛ | ϣⲙⲏⲛⲓ |
| nine | ⲯⲓⲧ | ⲯⲓϯ |
| ten | ⲙⲏⲧ | ⲙⲏϯ |
They are used like the numbers three to five in §15.3.
Partitive expressions with numbers employ the preposition ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗):
| ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| one of the men |
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| three of them |
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲉϫⲏⲟⲩ |
| three of the ships |
The number"one", ⲟⲩⲁⲓ (f. ⲟⲩⲓ) is also used as an indefinite pronoun: a certain one, a certain man (or woman), as in
| ⲁ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ϣⲁ ⲡⲁⲣⲭⲓⲉⲡⲓⲥⲕⲟⲡⲟⲥ. |
| A certain man went to the archbishop. |
And the words and expressions treated in the lesson.
17.1 The Imperative of most verbs is the same as the Infinitive, with no indication of number or gender:
| ⲙⲟϣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱⲓ. |
| Walk behind me. |
| ⲙⲉⲣ-ⲡϫⲟⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲱⲛⲓ. |
| Tie the boat to the rock. |
| ⲙⲉⲛⲣⲉ-ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ. |
| Love the Lord. |
| ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| Listen to my words. |
Negation is with the prefix ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣ-:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲟⲩ. |
| Don't speak with them. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉ ⲧⲃⲁⲕⲓ. |
| Do not go to the city. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲛⲕⲟⲧ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| Do not lie down here. |
A few verbs have special Imperative forms with prefixed ⲁ-:
| ⲛⲁⲩ: | ⲁⲛⲁⲩ | look, see |
| ⲟⲩⲱⲛ: | ⲁⲟⲩⲱⲛ | open |
| ϫⲱ: | ⲁϫⲉ-, ⲁϫⲟⲧ⸗ | say, speak |
| ⲓⲛⲓ: | ⲁⲛⲓⲟⲩⲓ, ⲁⲛⲓⲧ⸗ | bring |
| ⲓⲣⲓ: | ⲁⲣⲓⲟⲩⲓ, ⲁⲣⲓ-, ⲁⲣⲓⲧ⸗ | do, make |
The verb ⲙⲁ, ⲙⲁ-, ⲙⲁⲧ⸗ (or ⲙⲏⲉⲓ⸗) is used as the imperative of ϯ, but ϯ may also be used. The imperative of ⲉⲓ (to come) is expressed by ⲁⲙⲟⲩ, which has distinct feminine and plural forms: f. ⲁⲙⲏ, pl. ⲁⲙⲱⲓⲛⲓ.
17.2 The vocative is expressed by using a noun with the definite article or a possessive prefix: ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ O king! ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ O my son! The Greek vocative particle ⲱ (Gk. ὦ) may also be used, but not before a designation of God.
17.3 Infinitives of the type ⲙⲓⲥⲓ, with stressed vowel -ⲓ- and final unstressed -ⲉ, have the following prenominal and presuffixal forms:
| ⲙⲓⲥⲓ | ⲙⲁⲥ(ⲧ)- | ⲙⲁⲥ⸗ | to bear (a child) |
| ⲓϣⲓ | ⲉϣ- | ⲁϣ⸗ | to hang up, suspend |
The prenominal forms of many of these verbs occur with or without the final -ⲧ. Several important verbs of this type have irregularities:
| ⲓⲣⲓ | ⲉⲣ- | ⲁⲓ⸗ | to do, make |
| ⲓⲛⲓ | ⲉⲛ- | ⲉⲛ⸗ | to bring |
| ϣⲓⲛⲓ | ϣⲉⲛ- | ϣⲉⲛ⸗ | to seek, inquire |
| ϫⲓⲙⲓ | ϫⲉⲙ- | ϫⲉⲙ⸗ | to find |
The final ⲛ of ⲉⲛ-, ϣⲉⲛ-, and ϫⲉⲙ- may be assimilated to ⲙ̄ before a following ⲡ or ⲙ. Note that in ⲉⲛ⸗, ϣⲉⲛ⸗ and ϫⲉⲙ⸗ the syllabic ⲉⲛ is the stressed vowel of the word. ⲉⲣ- is often written as ⲉⲣ-. Suffixes are added to these forms regularly: ϫⲉⲙⲧ, ϫⲉⲙⲕ, ϫⲉⲙⲓ, ϫⲉⲙϥ, ϫⲉⲙⲥ, ϫⲉⲙⲛ, ϫⲉⲙ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ, ϫⲉⲙⲟⲩ. ⲁⲓ⸗ is inflected like ⲧⲏⲓ⸗ in §11.2.
17.4 There is a certain ambiguity surrounding the terms transitive and intransitive in classifying Coptic verbs. The strictest definition of a transitive verb requires (1) that its direct object be marked with the "preposition" ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗) and (2) that the general equivalence ⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ = ⲕⲟⲧϥ be attested for the verb, i.e. that the verb possess prenominal and presuffixal forms. A less strict definition would require a transitive verb to satisfy either, but not necessariy both, of the above criteria. This is approximately the position adopted by W. E. Crum in his Coptic Dictionary, the standard lexical work in the field. Verbs not satisfying either of these criteria are labeled intransitive or are left unlabeled.
In the present work the designation transitive is extended to include verbs having prenominal and presuffixal forms that correspond exactly in meaning to the infinitive with ⲉ or ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ (e.g. ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ, ϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ). Thus ⲥⲟⲑⲙⲉϥ = ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟϥ and ϣⲉⲛϥ = ϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱϥ are taken as fully equivalent to the criterion ⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ = ⲕⲟⲧϥ above. A verb like ⲁⲙⲁϩⲓ (to seize) is considered transitive because its direct object is marked by ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, even though it does not have prenominal or presuffixal forms. It seems reasonable, therefore, to extend the designation transitive even further and to include verbs like ⲛⲁⲩ and ⲉⲙⲓ (to understand), both of which normally have an object with ⲉ, but neither of which has prenominal or presuffixal forms. In other words, as long as there is no lexical contrast requiring the preposition ⲉ to have the semantic force of a true preposition (for, in regard to), we have generally labeled verbs with ⲉ-objects as transitive in the glossary of this work. Some subjectiveness remains, however, and one can sympathize with W. E. Crum in his desire to drop the terms transitive and intransitive altogether (op. cit., p. vii).
ⲙⲟⲩϯ vb. tr. to call (ⲉ), summon, name. Note the constructions:
| ⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ϫⲉ ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ. |
| They named him John. |
| ⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲣⲁⲛ ϫⲉ ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ. |
| They called his name John. |
| ⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ. |
| They named him after his father. |
18.1 The First Present (Pres. I):
| ϯⲣⲓⲙⲓ | I am weeping |
| ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ | you (m.s.) are weeping |
| ⲧⲉⲣⲓⲙⲓ | you (f.s.) are weeping |
| ϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ | he is weeping |
| ⲥⲣⲓⲙⲓ | she is weeping |
| ⲧⲉⲛⲣⲓⲙⲓ | we are weeping |
| ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲣⲓⲙⲓ | you (pl.) are weeping |
| ⲥⲉⲣⲓⲙⲓ | they are weeping |
With nominal subject:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| The man is weeping. |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| A man is weeping. |
The prefix of the 2nd pers. fem. sing. also appears as ⲧⲉⲣ- or ⲧⲣ̄-. ⲟⲩⲟⲛ must be used to introduce an indefinite nominal subject.
The First Present usually describes action, activity, or process in progress at the time of speaking. It is therefore equivalent to the English progressive present (am weeping, am writing, etc.) except in those English verbs that do not normally use this form (e.g. think, know, see, hear, understand, wish, hope, believe), where its equivalent is the simple present: ϯⲉⲙⲓ I understand, ϯⲛⲁⲩ I see, etc.
The First Present is negated with ⲛ̀ before the subject pronoun and ⲁⲛ after the verb: ⲛ̀ϯⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ I am not weeping. The second pers. ⲛ̀ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ usually appears as ⲛ̀ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ, with ⲅ for ⲕ by assimilation to the preceding ⲛ̀ and with a shift of the supralinear stroke: ⲛ̀ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ to ⲛ̀ⲭⲣⲓⲙⲓ (i.e. from əng- to nəg-). A similar shift of the stroke occurs in the 3rd pers. sing.: ⲛ̀ϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ, ⲛ̀ⲥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ. ⲛ̀ is optional before a nominal subject: (ⲙ̀) ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ. An indefinite subject requires the negation ⲙⲙⲟⲛ; no ⲁⲛ is used: ⲙⲙⲟⲛ(ⲟⲩ)ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ no man (or no one) is weeping. As in the negative of predications of existence, the indefinite article is usually omitted if the negation is felt as general rather than particular.
The infinitives ϣⲉ ⲛⲁ⸗ and ⲓ are not used in the First Present.
With the sole exception of ⲟⲩⲱϣ (to wish, love), the prenominal and presuffixal forms of the infinitive cannot be used in the First Present. Certain compound verbs are an exception to this rule and will be considered in a later lesson.
The pronominal prefixes of the First Present and its negative are also used before adverbial predicates:
| ϯϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ. |
| I am in the house. |
| ⲛ̀ⲥⲉϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ. |
| They are not in the house. |
18.2 The First Future (Fut. I) is formed by prefixing ⲛⲁ- to the Infinitive. Inflection is exactly like that of the First Present, including its negative:
| ϯⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ, ⲭⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ… | |
| Neg. | ⲛ̀ϯⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ, ⲛ̀ⲭⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ… |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ | |
| Neg. | (ⲙ̀) ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲁⲛ |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ | |
| Neg. | ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲣⲓⲙⲓ |
The First Future corresponds to the English simple future (I shall write, I shall go) or to the intended (planned) future (I am going to write, going to go). The 2nd pers. pl. commonly appears as ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲁ- for expected ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁ-.
18.3 The term intransitive as applied to Coptic verbs requires a further comment (cf. §17.4). Coptic has many intransitive verbs, such as verbs of motion (ⲉⲓ, ϣⲉ ⲛⲁ⸗, ⲙⲟϣⲓ) and verbs denoting activities involving no direct object (ⲣⲓⲙⲓ, ⲛⲕⲟⲧ, etc.), whose classification is not problematic. But the intransitive use of verbs that are also transitive requires some attention. In certain situations any transitive verb may be used intransitively: the object may be omitted because it is understood from the context, or the speaker may wish to predicate the action of the verb without reference to any particular object (e.g. we plowed all day as opposed to we plowed the field). This usage is as commonplace in Coptic as it is in English and will not be noted in the vocabularies or final glossary. There is another type of intransitive usage, however, that is quite different. Compare the following:
| (1) | ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥϫⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲉϥⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| when he had completed his days |
| (2) | ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲛⲉϥⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| when his days were completed |
(1) is the normal active transitive use of ϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ; (2) involves a change in voice from active to passive (or medio-passive, as a more general term). For speakers of English this medio-passive usage offers no problem since many English verbs have the same ambiguity: he closed the door vs. the door closed; he burned the paper vs. the paper burned. In the vocabularies and final glossary the designation intr. before the meaning of a verb whose transitive meaning is given first will always refer to this medio-passive usage. Of the transitive verbs introduced up to this point, the following have important medio-passive uses:
18.4 Infinitives of the type ⲕⲱϯ (to turn), with stressed -ⲱ- and final unstressed -ⲉ, have the same prenominal and presuffixal forms as the type ⲕⲱⲧ:
| ⲕⲱϯ | ⲕⲉⲧ- | ⲕⲟⲧ⸗ | to turn |
ⲛⲟⲩϫ (to throw), with -ⲟⲩ- for -ⲱ- because of initial ⲛ (cf. p. xvi) also belongs to this type; the infinitive ⲛⲟⲩϫ mentioned in Voc. 14 is a less frequent variant. Infinitives with -ⲱⲱ- and final -ⲉ have similar forms:
| ϣⲱⲱϭⲉ | ϣⲉⲉϭⲉ- | ϣⲟⲟϭ⸗ | to strike, wound |
18.5 Greek verbs occur frequently in Coptic texts. These have a single fixed infinitive form resembling the Greek imperative form and are inflected like any other Coptic verb. Examples:
| ⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ | πιστεύω | to believe (ⲉ) |
| ⲉⲡⲓⲧⲓⲙⲁ | ἐπιτιμάω | to rebuke (ⲛⲁ⸗) |
| ⲡⲉⲓⲣⲁⲍⲉ | πειράζω | to tempt (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗) |
| ⲛⲏⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ | νηστεύω | to fast |
| ⲁⲣⲭⲓ | ἄρχω | to begin (+ ⲛ̀ + Inf.: to begin to do something) |
And the Greek verbs in §18.5 above.
19.1 The relative forms of the First Present and First Future employ the relative pronoun ⲉⲧ, ⲉⲧⲉ. When the relative pronoun is the subject of the relative clause, no further pronominal subject element is required:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲣⲓⲙⲓ |
| the man who is weeping |
| ⲛⲉⲧ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ |
| those who hear my words |
| ⲙⲙⲁⲧⲟⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲛⲁⲁⲙⲁϩⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| the soldiers who will seize him |
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲛⲁⲓⲛⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡϩⲁⲧ |
| the men who will bring the silver |
When the relative pronoun is not the subject of the relative clause, a subject noun or pronoun and resumptive pronouns are required; the relative pronoun combines with the various subject elements as follows:
| ⲉϯ | who/which I… |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲕ | who/which you… |
| ⲉⲧⲉ(ⲣ) | etc. |
| ⲉⲧⲉϥ | |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲥ | |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ | |
| ⲉⲧⲟⲩ | (note this form) |
With nominal subject:
| ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| who/which the man… |
Study the following examples carefully:
| ⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉϯⲥϧⲁⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ |
| the words which I am writing |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉⲕϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱϥ |
| the man whom you are seeking |
| ⲧⲃⲁⲕⲓ ⲉⲧⲟⲩⲟⲩⲱϩ ⲛ̀ϧⲏⲧⲥ |
| the city in which they are settling |
| ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉⲧⲉϥⲛⲁⲭⲁϥ ⲛ̀ⲥⲱϥ |
| the child whom he will leave behind |
| ⲛⲉⲛⲧⲟⲗⲏ ⲉⲧⲉϥⲛⲁⲧⲏⲓⲧⲟⲩ ⲛⲁⲛ |
| the commandments which he will give to us |
| ⲡϩⲁⲧ ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ ⲛⲁⲧⲏⲓϥ ⲉⲧⲟⲧⲕ |
| the money which your father will entrust to you |
When the verb of the relative clause is negative Pres. I or Fut. I, the relative pronoun is ⲉⲧⲉ and subject as well as resumptive pronouns must be expressed in all constructions:
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲥⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ |
| the men who do not heed me |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲁⲛ |
| the man who will not heed me |
| ⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲉⲙⲓ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ |
| the words which we do not understand |
| ⲛϯⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ⲥⲉⲛⲁⲁⲙⲁϩⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲁⲛ |
| the villages which they will not seize |
19.2 The direct object of a transitive verb may be used in a reflexive sense:
| ⲁⲓⲛⲟϫⲧ ⲉⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ ⲉ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ. |
| I threw myself to the ground. |
| ⲁϥⲓⲁϥ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲓⲁⲣⲟ. |
| He washed himself in the water of the river. |
Some verbs have special meanings in the reflexive, e.g.
ⲕⲟⲧ⸗ (1) to return, go back (to: ⲉⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ ⲉ, ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉ, ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϣⲁ, ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲉ, ⲉϩⲣⲏⲓ ⲉ); (2) to repeat an action, usually coordinated, as in
| ⲁϥⲕⲟⲧϥ ⲁϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He wept again. |
or with ⲉ + Inf., as in
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛⲕⲟⲧⲛ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟⲥ. |
| We did not see her again. |
The verb ⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ occurs optionally with reflexive suffixes: ⲁϥⲧⲱⲛϥ = ⲁϥⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ (he arose). After stem-final -ⲛ the 2nd pers. masc. sing. suffix -ⲕ often appears as -ⲅ: ⲁⲕⲧⲱⲛⲕ you arose.
The reflexive verb ⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗, to stand, is actually a compound of ⲟϩⲓ (a form of the verb ⲱϩⲓ, to stand) and the preposition ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗ to or at the foot/feet of. ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗ itself consists of the prep. ⲉ and the noun ⲣⲁⲧ⸗ foot, which belongs to that small group of nouns that may take pronominal suffixes in a possessive sense: ⲣⲁⲧ my foot, ⲣⲁⲧⲕ your foot, etc.
19.3 Infinitives of the type ⲥⲱⲧⲡ, to choose, constitute the largest class of verbs in Coptic and have the following prenominal and presuffixal forms:
| ⲥⲱⲧⲡ | ⲥⲉⲧⲡ- | ⲥⲟⲧⲡ⸗ |
When the final consonant of the infinitive is a blmnr consonant, the presuffixal form is usually written with -ⲉ- before the suffixes -ⲧ, -ⲕ, -ϥ, -ⲥ: ⲥⲟⲑⲙⲉϥ, ⲥⲟⲑⲙⲉⲧ, ⲥⲟⲑⲙⲉⲕ, etc. When the final consonant is -ϩ, spelling alternates between -ϩ and -ⲁϩ in the unbound form: ⲟⲩⲱⲛⲁϩ or ⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ.
When the second consonant of the Infinitive is ϩ (more rarely ϣ), the presuffixal form may have -ⲁ- instead of -ⲟ-:
| ⲟⲩⲱϩⲉⲙ | ⲟⲩⲁϩⲙ- | ⲟⲩⲁϩⲙ⸗ | to repeat |
| ⲑⲱϩⲉⲙ | ⲑⲁϩⲉⲙ- | ⲑⲁϩⲙ⸗ | to invite |
When the infinitive begins with ⲙ or ⲛ, -ⲱ- is replaced with -ⲟⲩ-:
| ⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ | ⲙⲉⲩⲧ- | ⲙⲟⲟⲩⲧ⸗ | to kill |
| ⲛⲟϩⲉⲙ | ⲛⲁϩⲉⲙ- | ⲛⲁϩⲙ⸗ | to rescue |
20.1 The Inflected (Causative) Infinitive.
| ⲧⲣⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | that I hear |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | that you hear |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. |
| ⲧⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲧⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲣⲉⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲧⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| that the man hear |
Negation is with ϣⲧⲉⲙ- placed either before the whole expression or before the infinitive: ϣⲧⲉⲙⲧⲣⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ or ⲧⲣⲁϣⲧⲉⲙⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ that I not hear.
The Inflected Infinitive is used in the following ways:
As a complementary infinitive, with ⲉ, after appropriate verbs of wishing or commanding when the subject of the infinitive is different from that of the main verb. Contrast
| ϯⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉ ϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| I want to remain here. |
| ϯⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲕϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| I want you to remain here. |
| ⲧⲉⲛⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉϣⲧⲉⲙⲧⲣⲉⲕϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| We want you not to go away. |
It is not incorrect, however, to say ϯⲟⲩⲱϣ ⲉⲧⲣⲁϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ, with no change in subject.
Like the ordinary infinitive with ⲉ, the Inflected Infinitive is used in a wide range of result or purpose expressions, often corresponding to English "for… to…"
| ⲁ-ⲡⲥⲏⲟⲩ ϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| The time arrived (lit. was fulfilled) for us to leave. |
| ⲁϥϯ ⲛⲁϥ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲉⲝⲟⲩⲥⲓⲁ ⲉⲧⲣⲉϥⲛⲟⲩϫ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ ϩⲁⲛⲡ︤ⲛ︦ⲁ︥ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲕⲁⲑⲁⲣⲧⲟⲛ. |
| He gave him the power (for him) to cast out unclean spirits. |
Because of the frequent use of the Inflected Infinitive with ⲉ, we shall spell this as a single unit, as in the preceding examples.
With the preposition ϧⲉⲛ + the definite article ⲡ- the Inflected Inf. has the force of a temporal clause with "while, as":
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲉϥⲙⲟϣⲓ |
| while/as he was walking |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲉ-ⲡⲟⲩⲏⲃ ϣⲗⲏⲗ |
| as the priest was praying |
The tense of such "clauses" depends on the context. They occur frequently after introductory ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ:
| ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲇⲉ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲉϥϣⲉⲙϣⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉⲣⲫⲉⲓ… |
| It happened, however, as he was serving in the temple, that… |
After the preposition ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ and without an article the Inflected Inf. is equivalent to a temporal clause with "after":
| ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲧⲣⲁⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ |
| after I saw them, … |
| ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲧⲣⲉ-ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| after his father left, … |
20.2 Impersonal Expressions. The impersonal use of ⲁⲥϣⲱⲡⲓ was introduced in Vocabulary 9. There are several other impersonal expressions, some verbal, some anomalous, which occur frequently:
ϩⲱϯ it is necessary (neg. ⲛ̀ ϩⲱϯ ⲁⲛ), followed by the Inflected Inf. The subject of the infinitive may be anticipated with the preposition ⲉ; an untranslatable ⲡⲉ often co-occurs with ϩⲱϯ.
| ϩⲱϯ (ⲡⲉ) ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲛⲫⲱⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| It is necessary that we flee. |
| ϩⲱϯ (ⲡⲉ) ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲉⲧⲣⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁⲕ. |
| It is necessary that I speak with you. |
ⲟⲩⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ it is possible; neg.: ⲙⲙⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ it is not possible. The subject of a following infinitive may be introduced with ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, with the Inflected Inf., or both:
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ ⲉ ⲉⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| It is not possible to understand his words. |
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ ⲉ ⲉⲙⲓ. |
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϣϫⲟⲙ (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲛ) ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲛⲉⲙⲓ. |
| It is not possible for us to understand. |
ⲥϣⲉ (or ⲥϣⲉ) it is appropriate, proper, fitting; neg.: ⲛ̀ ⲥϣⲉ ⲁⲛ or ⲙⲉϣϣⲉ. The subject of the infinitive may be anticipated with prep. ⲉ.
| ⲥϣⲉ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉ ϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ. |
| It is proper for him to enter. |
| ⲛ̀ ⲥϣⲉ ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ ⲁⲛ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| It is not proper for you to remain here. |
The relative forms ⲡⲉⲧⲉ ⲥϣⲉ, ⲛⲉⲧⲉ ⲥϣⲉ, what is proper (neg.: ⲡⲉⲧⲉ/ⲛⲉⲧⲉ ⲙⲉϣϣⲉ) are often used as substantives.
ⲣⲁⲛⲁ⸗ to please, used impersonally with subject ⲥ- and an object suffix, or with a personal subject and a reflexive suffix. The suffix on ⲁⲛⲁ⸗ is required; a nominal object is anticipated by a suffix and introduced with ⲛ̀.
Study the following examples:
| ⲁⲥⲣⲁⲛⲁϥ ⲉⲧⲣⲉϥⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲕⲟⲥⲙⲟⲥ. |
| It pleased him to come (i.e. he came willingly) into this world. |
| ⲁⲥⲣⲁⲛⲁϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲙⲏϣ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲩⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ. |
| It pleased the crowd (for them) to see this. |
| ⲁⲓⲣⲁⲛⲁⲓ ⲉⲧⲣⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲛⲉⲕⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| It pleased me to hear your words. |
Note also the partially synonymous verb ⲉⲣ-ⲉϩⲛⲁ⸗ to be willing, desire, which is used only with a personal subject and reflexive suffix:
| ⲁⲓⲉⲣ-ⲉϩⲛⲁⲓ ⲉⲧⲣⲁⲥϧⲁⲓ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲁⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| I wanted to write to you (about) these things. |
ⲉⲣ-ⲉϩⲛⲁ⸗ is not used in the First Present; ⲣⲁⲛⲁ⸗ has no such restriction.
20.3 The verb ⲡⲉϫⲉ-, ⲡⲉϫⲁ⸗, followed by its subject, is equivalent to ϫⲱ in the First Perfect, but is used only to report speech, with ϫⲉ:
| ⲡⲉϫⲉ-ⲡϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ϫⲉ… |
| The old man said, "… |
| ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ⲛⲏⲓ ϫⲉ… |
| He said to me, "… |
20.4 Infinitives of the types ⲥⲟⲗⲥⲉⲗ, to console, and ϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ, to disturb, have the following prenominal and presuffixal forms:
| ⲥⲟⲗⲥⲗ̄ | ⲥⲗ̄ⲥⲗ̄- | ⲥⲉⲗⲥⲱⲗ⸗ |
| ϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ | ϣⲑⲉⲣⲧⲉⲣ- | ϣⲧⲉⲣⲑⲱⲣ⸗ |
With the exceptions of the infinitives treated below in Lesson 26, the remaining types of transitive infinitives do not constitute regular classes of any significant size. The following verbs of minor types have occurred in the lessons up to this point:
| ϣⲉⲙϣⲓ | ϣⲉⲙϣⲉ- | ϣⲉⲙϣⲏⲧ⸗ | to serve |
| ⲥϧⲁⲓ | ⲥϧⲉ- | ⲥϧⲏⲧ⸗ | to write |
| ⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ | ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ- | ⲥⲟⲩⲱⲛ⸗ | to know |
| ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ | ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲉⲩ- | ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ⸗ | to send |
When the presuffixal form of the infinitive ends in a diphthong, as in ⲥϧⲏⲧ⸗ and ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ⸗, the object suffix of the 3rd pers. pl. regularly appears as -ⲥⲟⲩ: ⲥϧⲏⲧⲟⲩ to write them, ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩⲥⲟⲩ to send them. The -ⲥ- of this form sometimes appears also before other suffixes, e.g. ⲥϩⲁⲓⲥϥ̄ to write it.
And the impersonal expressions ϩⲱϯ, ⲥϣⲉ, ⲟⲩⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ, ⲙⲙⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ.
21.1 The Imperfect.
| ⲛⲁⲓⲕⲱⲧ | I was building |
| ⲛⲁⲕⲕⲱⲧ | you were building |
| ⲛⲁⲣⲉⲕⲱⲧ | etc. |
| ⲛⲁϥⲕⲱⲧ | |
| ⲛⲁⲥⲕⲱⲧ | |
| ⲛⲁⲛⲕⲱⲧ | |
| ⲛⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲕⲱⲧ | |
| ⲛⲁⲩⲕⲱⲧ |
| ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲕⲱⲧ |
| the man was building |
The Imperfect is optionally, but often, followed by an untranslatable ⲡⲉ: ⲛⲁⲓⲕⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ, ⲛⲁⲕⲕⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ, etc. Negation is with ⲁⲛ: ⲛⲁⲓⲕⲱⲧ ⲁⲛ (ⲡⲉ), ⲛⲁⲕⲕⲱⲧ ⲁⲛ (ⲡⲉ), etc.
The Imperfect is used to describe an action, activity, or process as in progress in past time and is normally the equivalent of the English past progressive unless idiom requires the simple past, e.g. ⲛⲁⲩⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ they knew (not: they were knowing). It also often conveys the meaning of habitual or recurring activity in the past: they used to build, they would build.
Relative clauses containing an Imperfect are introduced with the relative pronoun ⲉⲧⲉ or, more frequently, with ⲉ- prefixed directly to the verbal form:
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲁϥⲙⲟϣⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲉ ⲉⲛⲁϥⲙⲟϣⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ |
| the man who was walking on the road |
| ⲡⲏⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲁⲩⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| ⲡⲏⲓ ⲉⲛⲁⲩⲕⲱⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| the house which they were building |
Pronominal resumption of the subject is required. In general, the prenominal and suffixal (prepronominal) forms of the infinitive may not be used in the Imperfect.
21.2 The Qualitative. Many verbs possess a second lexical form known as the qualitative. The qualitative describes a state or quality resulting from the action, activity, or process expressed by the Infinitive; it is most conveniently taken as equivalent to English "to be" plus an adjective. The qualitative of transitive verbs is passive from the English point of view. E.g.
| Inf. | ⲕⲱⲧ | to build | Q. | ⲕⲏⲧ | to be built (i.e. in a fully constructed state) |
| Inf. | ϩⲱⲡ | to hide | Q. | ϩⲏⲡ | to be hidden, secret |
The form of the qualitative is more or less predictable for verbs belonging to the main classes:
type
| ⲕⲱⲧ: | Q. | ⲕⲏⲧ |
| ⲙⲟⲩⲣ: | Q. | ⲙⲏⲣ |
| ⲏⲡ | to be reckoned, ascribed to (ⲉ) |
| ϫⲏⲕ (ⲉⲃⲟⲗ) | to be finished, done, perfect |
| ⲃⲏⲗ | to be loosened, undone, untied, dissolved |
| ϣⲏⲡ | to be received, acceptable |
| ⲙⲉϩ | to be full |
| ⲟⲩⲉϩ | to live, dwell, be |
| ⲙⲏⲣ | to be bound |
| ⲑⲏⲙ | to be shut |
| ⲟⲩⲏⲛ | to be open |
type
| ⲕⲱϯ: | Q. | ⲕⲏⲧ |
| ⲛⲟⲩϫ: | Q. | ⲛⲏϫ |
| ⲕⲏⲧ | to be turned, turning, circulating |
| ⲛⲏϫ | to be lying, reclining (esp. at table); to be |
type
| ⲙⲓⲥⲓ: | Q. | ⲙⲟⲥⲓ |
| ⲙⲟⲥi | to be born |
| ϣⲟⲃⲓ | to be different, various |
type
| ⲥⲱⲧⲡ: | Q. | ⲥⲟⲧⲡ |
| ⲫⲱϧⲧ: | Q. | ⲫⲁϧⲧ |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛϩ | to be manifest, clear, plain |
| ϭⲟⲣⲡ | to be known, revealed, clear |
| ⲣⲟⲕϩ | to be burned, destroyed by fire |
| ⲫⲁϧⲧ | to be prostrated, bowing |
type
| ⲥⲟⲗⲥⲉⲗ: | Q. | ⲥⲉⲗⲥⲱⲗ |
| ϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ: | Q. | ϣⲧⲉⲣⲑⲱⲣ |
| ⲥⲉⲗⲥⲱⲗ | to be consoled |
| ϣⲧⲉⲣⲑⲱⲣ | to be disturbed, upset |
Otherwise, there is some irregularity:
| ⲭⲱ: | Q. | ⲭⲏ | to be situated, lying; to be |
| ⲥϧⲁⲓ: | Q. | ⲥϧⲏⲟⲩⲧ | to be in writing, written |
| ⲥⲓ: | Q. | ⲥⲏⲟⲩ | to be sated, full |
Note that ⲭⲏ, ⲛⲏϫ, and ⲟⲩⲉϩ may all correspond to English "to be" when location or position is involved.
The qualitative is a verb and may stand in place of the Infinitive in the First Present and the Imperfect, together with their negative and relative forms. It is especially important to keep in mind that the qualitative does not express a passive action (cf. §13.4); it describes the state that the subject is (or was) in:
| ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲟ ⲑⲏⲙ ⲡⲉ. | The door was shut. |
| ⲛ̀ϯϣⲧⲉⲣⲑⲱⲣ ⲁⲛ. | I am not disturbed. |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲏϫ ϩⲓ ⲡⲕⲁϩⲓ. | The man is lying on the ground. |
| ⲛⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲙⲏⲣ | the men who are bound |
The qualitative may not be used in any of the other conjugations introduced up to this point, including the various constructions with the Infinitive and Inflected Infinitive.
21.3 Prepositional phrases with ϧⲉⲛ + a noun with the indefinite article occur very frequently as adverbs:
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϫⲱⲕ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ | completely |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϣⲥ̄ⲛⲉ | suddenly |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϭⲉⲡⲏ | hurriedly |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲙⲏⲓ | truly |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩⲣⲁϣⲓ | joyfully |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϧⲓⲥⲓ | with difficulty, anxiously |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲟⲩϣⲑⲟⲣⲧⲉⲣ | agitatedly |
For ϣⲥ̄ⲛⲉ, ⲙⲏⲓ, and ϭⲉⲡⲏ see the Vocabulary below.
22.1 Possession is predicated by the use of ⲟⲩⲟⲛ and ⲟⲩⲟⲛ compounded with the preposition ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, ⲛ̀ⲧⲁ⸗. There are two sets of forms:
| (A) | (B) | |
|---|---|---|
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲓ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛϯ- | I have |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲕ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲕ- | you have |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ- | etc. |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧϥ- | |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲥ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲥ- | |
| ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲛ | ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲛ̄- | |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲏⲧⲉⲛ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛ- | |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲩ | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲟⲩ- |
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the man has |
And similarly for the negative: (A) ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁⲓ I do not have; (B) ⲙⲙⲟⲛϯ-. Set (B) is actually a reduced proclitic form of (A). Both sets may be accompanied by an untranslatable ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ (there).
If the possessor is pronominal (i.e. suffixal), an immediately following object is unmarked:
| (A) ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| (B) ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧϥ-ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He has a wife. |
But if some word intervenes (and this is possible only in set A), the object is marked with ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗).
| (A) ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| He has a wife. |
If the possessor is a noun, the object is usually not marked:
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. |
| The man has a wife. |
Pronominal objects are used only with set (A) and are attached directly to the subject suffixes. These are generally limited to the third person forms:
| m.s. | -ϥ, -ⲥϥ̄ |
| f.s. | -ⲥ |
| ⲥ.pl. | -ⲥⲟⲩ |
as in ⲟⲩⲟⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓϥ̄, ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓⲥϥ̄ I have it (m.), ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲕⲥ̄ you have it (f.), ⲟⲩⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲥⲟⲩ he has them.
We have seen that the genitive is expressed with ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ after indefinite nouns (ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ), nouns with demonstrative prefixes (ⲡⲁⲓϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲁⲥⲟⲛ), and nouns with a following modifier (ⲡϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ϭⲁⲗⲉ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ). ⲛ̀ⲧⲁ⸗ is used similarly when the possessor is pronominal:
| ⲟⲩⲃⲱⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲓ |
| a servant of mine |
| ⲡⲁⲓϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲕ |
| this book of yours |
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ |
| three sons of his |
ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ, ⲛ̀ⲧⲁ⸗ may be used predicatively:
| ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ ⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ. |
| He has a large house. |
| ⲡⲏⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁϥ |
| the house that belongs to him |
ϣⲟⲡ ⲛⲁ⸗ is also sometimes used to predicate possession:
| ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϩⲁⲧ ϣⲟⲡ ⲛⲏⲓ. |
| I have no money. |
The occasional use of ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ to indicate possession should also be noted. We have already seen an instance of this in the idiom ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϫⲟⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ lit., there is/is-not power in.
22.2 Possessive pronouns, corresponding to English mine, yours, his, hers, etc., are formed by adding the appropriate pronominal suffix to m.s. ⲫⲱ⸗, f.s. ⲧⲱ⸗, c.pl. ⲛⲟⲩ⸗; thus, ⲫⲱⲓ, ⲫⲱⲕ, ⲫⲱ, ⲫⲱϥ, ⲫⲱⲥ, ⲫⲱⲛ, ⲫⲱⲧⲉⲛ, ⲫⲱⲟⲩ, and similarly for ⲧⲱ⸗ and ⲛⲟⲩ⸗. When used as predicates of ⲡⲉ- sentences, they serve to predicate possession:
| ⲛϫⲱⲙ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲟⲩϥ ⲛⲉ |
| the books which are his |
| ⲫⲱⲓ ⲡⲉ. |
| It is mine. |
| ⲡⲁⲓϫⲟⲓ ⲫⲱϥ ⲡⲉ. |
| This ship is his. |
| ⲛⲟⲩⲕ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are yours. |
| ⲧⲱⲕ ⲧⲉ. |
| It (f.) is yours. |
The proclitic pronouns ⲫⲁ-, ⲑⲁ-, and ⲛⲁ- are used to express "that of, that which pertains or belongs to". Number and gender are determined by an understood or expressed antecedent. The exact meaning must be gained from the context:
| ⲛⲁ-ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ |
| the affairs of my father |
| ⲛⲉϥϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲁ-ⲡⲉϥⲥⲟⲛ |
| his children and those of his brother |
| ⲛⲁ-ⲧⲃⲁⲕⲓ |
| the inhabitants of the city |
| ⲛⲁ-ⲧⲁⲓⲙⲓⲛⲓ |
| people of this sort |
22.3 The qualitative (continued). Many intransitive verbs of motion or position (e.g. ⲙⲟϣⲓ, ⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧ⸗, ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ) do not have a strong contrast in meaning between infinitive and qualitative, the process and state involved being about the same thing. ⲟϩⲉ and ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ are in fact qualitative forms that have usurped the role of the infinitives ⲱϩⲓ and ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ for all practical purposes. But note the following:
| Inf. | Q. | |
|---|---|---|
| ⲃⲱⲕ | ⲃⲏⲕ | to be going, be on the way there |
| ⲓ | ⲛⲏⲟⲩ | to be coming, be on the way here, be about to come, be about to arrive |
| ⲫⲱⲧ | ⲫⲏⲧ | to be fleeing, running, in pursuit |
| ϧⲱⲛⲧ | ϧⲉⲛⲧ | to be near, nigh, at hand |
| ϭⲱ | ϭⲉⲉⲧ | to remain, wait, stay, be |
| ⲙⲟⲩⲛ | ⲙⲏⲛ | to be enduring, lasting, continual |
| ⲁⲗⲏⲓ | ⲁⲗⲏⲩ | to be riding, mounted |
The infinitives ⲉⲓ and ⲃⲱⲕ may not be used in the First Present and Imperfect; only the qualitatives ⲛⲏⲟⲩ and ⲃⲏⲕ appear in these conjugations. For the other verbs the qualitative is preferred, but the infinitive is also found. The future nuance of ⲛⲏⲟⲩ is especially noteworthy.
There are many intransitive verbs for which the infinitive and qualitative bear a "becoming"/"being" relationship to each other:
| Inf. | ϣⲱⲡⲓ | to become, come into existence |
| Q. | ϣⲟⲡ | to be, to exist |
| Inf. | ⲃⲟⲕⲓ | to become pregnant |
| Q. | ⲉⲉⲧ | to be pregnant |
Included among these are many verbs with -ⲟ- or -ⲁ- in the final stem syllable:
| Inf. | ⲛϣⲟⲧ | to become hard |
| Q. | ⲛⲁϣⲧ | to be hard |
| Inf. | ⲟⲩϫⲁⲓ | to become well |
| Q. | ⲟⲩⲟϫ | to be well |
| Inf. | ϩⲕⲟ | to become hungry |
| Q. | ϩⲟⲕⲉⲣ | to be hungry |
| Inf. | ⲁⲓⲁⲓ | to increase |
| Q. | ⲟⲓ | to be great |
| Inf. | ⲟⲩⲟⲡ | to become holy |
| Q. | ⲟⲩⲁⲃ | to be holy |
23.1 The Circumstantial.
| ⲉⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | I, hearing |
| ⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | you, hearing |
| ⲉⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. |
| ⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲉⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| the man, hearing |
The Circumstantial is used only in subordinate clauses modifying either a particular element of the main clause or the main clause as a whole. Such clauses describe an activity or state existing simultaneously with the time designated by the verb of the main clause and do not, in themselves, have a tense. They correspond to various English constructions: nominative absolutes, participial modifiers, or temporal clauses with "as, while, when" and a progressive verb form. Typical uses in Coptic include
subject complement:
| ⲉⲓⲟϩⲓ ⲉⲣⲁⲧ ϩⲁϩⲧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉⲣⲫⲉⲓ, ⲁⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲏϣ. |
| Standing near the temple, I saw a great crowd. |
object complement:
| ⲁⲩϩⲉⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϥϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲁⲅⲟⲣⲁ. |
| They found the man sitting in the marketplace. |
| ⲁⲛⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲱⲟⲩ ⲉⲩⲙⲟϣⲓ ϩⲓ ⲡⲙⲱⲓⲧ. |
| We saw them walking on the road. |
complement to the entire main clause:
| ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲉⲛⲥⲁϧ ϫⲱ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲁⲓⲥⲁϫⲓ, ⲁⲩⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ ϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ ϣⲱⲡⲓ. |
| As our teacher was saying these things, a great wonder occurred. |
If the context requires it, circumstantial clauses may also be translated as causal, concessive, or conditional clauses.
There are several important special uses of circumstantial clauses in Coptic:
They are regularly used as relative clauses to modify an indefinite antecedent. Contrast
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲉⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ |
| the man who understands my words |
| ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϥⲉⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ |
| a man who understands my words |
Such indefinite antecedents include ϩⲗⲓ, ⲟⲩⲁⲓ, ⲟⲩⲟⲛ, and ϩⲁⲛⲟⲩⲟⲛ. Further examples will be found in the exercises.
Certain verbs are regularly followed by the Circumstantial of a complementary verb:
| ⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩⲛ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ⲉⲩⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϫⲱⲣϩ ⲧⲏⲣϥ. |
| They continued talking the whole night. |
| ⲁⲥⲗⲟ ⲉⲥⲣⲓⲙⲓ. |
| She stopped crying. |
The Circumstantial of ϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ϫⲉ is regularly used to introduce direct quotation after appropriate verbs:
| ⲁϥⲟⲩⲱϣⲃ̄ ⲛⲁⲩ, ⲉϥϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ϫⲉ… |
| He answered them, saying… |
The Circumstantial is not negated. Instead, the circumstantial prefix ⲉ-, also called the circumstantial converter, is added to the negative of the First Present:
| ⲉ-ⲛ̀ϯⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲁⲛ |
| I, not hearing |
| ⲉ-ⲛ̀ⲅⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲁⲛ |
| you, not hearing |
After ⲉ- the syllabic pronunciation of ⲛ is given up; the stroke is not needed, but is sometimes retained.
23.2 Nouns as adjectives. In Coptic, as in English, a large number of nouns may do double duty as adjectives (cf. pencil sharpener, bookstore, brick wall, etc.). The order is reversed in Coptic, with the modifying noun second, preceded by the adjectival linking ⲛ̀ (ⲙ̀):
| ⲟⲩⲁⲫⲟⲧ ⲛ̀ ϩⲁⲧ |
| a silver cup |
| ⲟⲩⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ ϣⲁϥⲉ |
| a desert place |
| ⲡⲉϥⲥⲙⲟⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲥⲱⲙⲁ |
| his corporeal form (lit. body-form) |
| ⲟⲩⲓⲁⲣⲟ ⲛ̀ ⲭⲣⲱⲙ |
| a fiery river |
Such items are very frequent, but not as freely formed as their English counterparts. In some cases two translations are possible: ⲟⲩⲁⲫⲟⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲏⲣⲡ a wine cup or a cup of wine. Note that, as with adjectives, the construction differs from the genitive by the absence of an article on the second noun.
Several words form a large number of compounds whose meanings are more or less completely predictable. Among these are
ⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ (place of), as in
| ⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ ϣⲱⲡⲓ | dwelling place |
| ⲙⲁ ⲛ̄ ⲟⲩⲱⲙ | eating place, refectory |
| ⲙⲁ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲟϣⲓ | road, path |
| ⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲕⲁ-ⲱⲓⲕ | pantry (place for putting bread) |
ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ (seller of, vendor of, dealer in), as in
| ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲉⲃⲧ | fish-monger |
| ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲁϥ | meat-seller |
| ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲏⲣⲡ | wine-seller |
| ⲥⲁ ⲛ̀ ϩⲁⲧ | dealer in silver |
A glance through the final Glossary will provide dozens of further examples.
The nouns ⲣⲱⲙⲓ and ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ often occur redundantly in this construction; the order of the nouns may be reversed:
| ⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ |
| his sister (lit., woman-sister) |
| ⲡϩⲁⲙϣⲉ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the carpenter (lit., man-carpenter) |
| ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ϫⲁϫⲓ |
| the enemy (lit., enemy-man) |
Noun-noun modification does not always correspond exactly to English idiom, but little difficulty will be met in translating these constructions. Most of them will not be given separate listing in the vocabularies or Glossary.
24.1 The Second Present has exactly the same inflection as the Circumstantial. This ambiguity poses a serious difficulty for the reader of Sahidic Coptic which can be resolved only by a careful study of the context. The uses of the Second Present parallel those of the Second Perfect:
emphasis on an adverbial element:
| ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲛⲁⲓ ϣⲟⲡ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ⲉⲑⲃⲉ ⲛⲁⲛⲟⲃⲓ. |
| It is because of my sins that these things happen to me. |
preceding various interrogative expressions:
| ⲉⲕϣⲓⲛⲓ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲛⲓⲙ? |
| Whom do you seek? |
| ⲉϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ⲉ ⲟⲩ? |
| Why is he weeping? |
| ⲉϥⲑⲱⲛ? |
| Where is he? |
When ⲑⲱⲛ is used with a nominal subject, the usual idiom is ⲉϥⲑⲱⲛ N? Where is N?, without the expected ⲛ̀ϫⲉ:
| ⲉϥⲑⲱⲛ ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ? |
| Where is your father? |
The alternate construction (ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲉⲕⲓⲱⲧ ⲑⲱⲛ?) is less frequent.
Clauses containing second tense forms are negated with ⲁⲛ:
| ⲉⲓⲟⲩⲉϩ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ ⲁⲛ. |
| It is not here that I dwell. |
| ⲛ̄ⲧⲁⲓⲁⲓⲥ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲁⲛ. |
| It is not for you that I did it. |
As may be seen from the translation, the negation applies to the adverbial element and is not a negation of the verb proper.
24.2 The Bipartite Conjugation (Present-Imperfect System). The First Present, its relative forms, the Circumstantial, the Second Present, and the Imperfect comprise a system:
| Pres. I | ϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Rel. Pres. I | ⲉⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| Circumstantial | ⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Pres. II | ⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Imperfect | ⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
Following the penetrating analysis of H. J. Polotsky (see Bibliography), Coptic scholars now refer to this system as the Bipartite Conjugation. This term arises from the fact that the base form, the First Present, consists only of subject + predicate, with no conjugational prefix. The remaining forms of the system consist of this bipartite nucleus preceded by a set of elements called converters: the relative converter ⲉⲧ/ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ, the circumstantial converter ⲉ/ⲉⲣⲉ, the second tense converter ⲉ/ⲉⲣⲉ, and the imperfect converter ⲛⲁ/ⲛⲁⲣⲉ. The term tripartite is applied to all other Coptic verbal conjugations, which consist of a verbal prefix + subject + predicate, e.g. the First Perfect ⲁ⸗ϥ-ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲁ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ. The First Future is a special case and will be treated in the following lesson.
The conjugations belonging to the Bipartite Conjugation may have three kinds of predicates: infinitives, qualitatives, or adverbial predicates (i.e. adverbs or prepositional phrases). In the tripartite conjugations only the infinitive may be used. The conjugations of the Bipartite Conjugation, as we have already seen, characterize an action as durative, continuing, or (less commonly) habitual. The following features of the Bipartite Conjugation are equally distinctive:
The Imperfect may be expanded into a subsystem of its own by the prefixation of the other converters:
| Imperfect | ⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Imperfect Rel. | ⲉⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| Imperfect Circum. | ⲉ-ⲛⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉ-ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
These forms have all the characteristics of, and belong to, the Bipartite Conjugation. The relative forms have already been introduced. The circumstantial forms are used syntactically exactly like the Circumstantial (of Pres. I). The past tense of the action is explicitly marked, however, while in the Circumstantial it must be gained from the context. Second tense forms of the Imperfect may occur, but they are too rare for consideration here. All verbal forms containing the imperfect converter may be followed by ⲡⲉ.
24.3 Numbers (continued). The 'teens are formed by prefixing ⲙⲉⲧ- to special forms of the units. ⲙⲉⲧ- is a proclitic form of ⲙⲉⲧ ten:
| 11 | m. | ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲁⲓ | f. | ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲓ |
| 12 | m. | ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ | f. | ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ(ⲉ) |
| 13 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϣⲟⲙⲧ | ||
| 14 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ | ||
| 15 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϯⲟⲩ | ||
| 16 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲟⲟⲩ | ||
| 17 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϣⲁϣϥ(ⲉ) | ||
| 18 | m. f. | ⲙⲉⲧϣⲙⲏⲛ |
Construction is the same as that of the units:
| ⲙⲉⲧϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| thirteen men |
25.1 The relative, imperfect, circumstantial, and second tense converters may be used with the First Perfect, the First Future, existential and possessive predications, and copulative sentences with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ. The relative forms for all of these have already been discussed. The second tense of the First Perfect, i.e. the Second Perfect, was introduced in Lesson 14. The second tense forms of existential, possessive, and copulative sentences are too rare for inclusion here.
| Neg. | ||
|---|---|---|
| First Perfect | ⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Perf. I Rel. | ⲉⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Perf. I Circum. | ⲉ-ⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Pluperfect | ⲛⲉ-ⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ (ⲡⲉ) |
| Second Perfect | ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲁⲛ |
The imperfect of the First Perfect (ⲛⲉ-ⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ) corresponds to the English pluperfect: he had heard, he had written. The circumstantial of the First Perfect is used to describe an action as completed prior to the tense of the verb in the main clause.
| ⲉ-ⲁϥϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ, ⲁϥⲥϧⲁⲓ… |
| Having sat down, he wrote… |
| ⲁⲛϩⲉⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉ-ⲁϥⲙⲟⲩ. |
| We found him dead (lit., having died). |
| First Future | ϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Fut. I Rel. | ⲉⲧⲉϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Fut. I Circum. | ⲉϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Fut. I Imperfect | ⲛⲁϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| Second Future | ⲉϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
The circumstantial of the First Future describes an action as imminent, about to take place, with respect to the tense of the main clause:
| ⲉⲓⲛⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲁϥⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ. |
| As I was about to leave, he summoned me. |
| ⲁⲛϩⲉⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉϥⲛⲁⲙⲟⲩ. |
| We found him on the point of death. |
The imperfect of the First Future describes an action as imminent in past time:
| ⲛⲁⲓⲛⲁⲁⲗⲏⲓ ⲉ ⲡϫⲟⲓ (ⲡⲉ). |
| I was about to get on the ship. |
This form is commonly called the imperfectum futuri. The Second Future (ⲉϥⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ) has all the normal uses of a second tense form. Special uses of both these conjugations will be mentioned later on.
The First Future and its related system are formally an off-shoot of the Present System, with ⲛⲁ- inserted before the infinitive. It has no other characteristics of the Bipartite Conjugation, however: (1) it is not durative (except with certain aspectually neutral verbs, e.g. ⲣⲁϣⲓ); (2) only the Infinitive may occur in predicate position; (3) the prenominal and prepronominal forms of the Infinitive occur freely.
| Existential and Possessive | ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲙⲙⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ |
| Relative | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙⲙⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ |
| Circumstantial | ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ |
| Imperfect | ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ/ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ | ⲛⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ/ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ |
The circumstantial forms describe a state simultaneous to the tense of the main clause:
| ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ⲱⲓⲕ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ, ⲁⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ. |
| There being no food there, we left. |
| ⲁⲛϩⲉⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛ ϫⲟⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ ⲉ ⲥⲁϫⲓ. |
| We found him unable to speak. |
The imperfect forms simply place the state in past time:
| ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ (or ⲛⲉⲩⲟⲛ-) ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ (ⲡⲉ). |
| There was a man. |
| ⲛⲉⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲙⲏϣ ⲛ̀ ⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ (ⲡⲉ). |
| He had many wives. |
Copulative sentences with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ:
| Relative | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ |
| Circumstantial | ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ | ⲉ-ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲁⲛ ⲡⲉ |
| Imperfect | ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲥⲁϧ ⲡⲉ |
The circumstantial and imperfect are used as above.
The circumstantial forms of all the subsystems listed above have a frequent use as relative clauses after indefinite antecedents:
| ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉ-ⲁϥⲕⲉⲧ-ⲟⲩⲏⲓ |
| a man who had built a house |
| ⲟⲩⲙⲩⲥⲧⲏⲣⲓⲟⲛ ⲉⲩⲛⲁϭⲟⲣⲡϥ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ |
| a mystery which is about to be revealed |
| ⲟⲩⲭⲏⲣⲁ ⲉ-ⲙⲙⲟⲛⲧⲁⲥ ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ |
| a widow who has no son |
| ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲭⲏⲣⲁ ⲧⲉ ⲧⲉϥⲙⲁⲩ |
| a boy whose mother is a widow |
The circumstantial converter ⲉⲣⲉ- is sometimes used improperly for ⲉ- before copulative sentences.
25.2 The Conjunctive.
| (ⲛ̀)ⲧⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕ-, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥ-, and ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥ- also appear frequently as ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕ-, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϥ-, ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲥ-. The conjunctive is used to continue the force of a preceding verbal prefix. In a sense, it is no more than an inflected form of the conjunction "and". It is especially frequent after a First Future or an Imperative:
| ϯⲛⲁϣⲉ ⲛⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ. |
| I shall go and speak with him. |
| ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉ ⲧⲁⲥⲃⲱ. |
| Sit down and listen to my teaching. |
| ⲉⲛ-ⲛϫⲱⲙ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲧⲏⲓⲧⲟⲩ ⲛⲁϥ. |
| Bring the books and give them to him. |
It may be used to continue the force of virtually any preceding verbal prefix except that of the affirmative First Perfect, but even this restriction does not hold in the relative forms. It is also used after an Inflected Infinitive, as in
| ϩⲱϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲛ ⲉⲧⲣⲉⲛϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲛ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲛⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ. |
| It is necessary that we go and speak with him. |
In many instances, especially where there is a change of subject, the Conjunctive clause has the meaning of a purpose or result clause:
| ⲁⲛⲓⲧϥ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲁⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ. |
| Bring him to me so that I may see him. |
| ⲙⲁ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ⲧⲟⲩⲟⲩⲱⲙ. |
| Give them (food) so that they may eat. |
This usage depends very much on the presence of an injunctive (imperative) force, implicit or explicit, in the first clause. For the conjunctive with Greek conjunctions, see Lesson 30.
The Conjunctive resembles the Tripartite Conjugation: only the Infinitive may be used as its verbal component. Negation is with -ϣⲧⲉⲙ- before the Infinitive. If the Conjunctive continues a negative verb, however, the negation may carry over.
The following selection is from the Sayings of the Fathers. See p. 1.6 for a brief description of this text.
| ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛ ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲭⲏⲙⲓ ⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁϥ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉϥⲥⲏϭ. ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲓⲛⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ, ⲁϥⲭⲁϥ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲡⲁ ⲙⲁⲕⲁⲣⲓⲟⲥ, ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁϥⲭⲁϥ ⲉϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ ϩⲁϩⲧⲉⲛ ⲡⲣⲟ, ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ ⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲉⲓ. ⲡϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲇⲉ ⲁϥϫⲟⲩϣⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲕⲟⲩϫⲓ ⲛ̀ ϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲉϥⲣⲓⲙⲓ, ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ⲛⲁϥ ϫⲉ, "ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲉⲛⲕ ⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ?" ⲛⲑⲟϥ ⲇⲉ ⲡⲉϫⲁϥ ϫⲉ, "ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉ. ⲁϥⲉⲛⲧ, ⲁϥⲛⲟϫⲧ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ, ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ." ⲡⲉϫⲉ-ⲡϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ ⲛⲁϥ ϫⲉ, "ⲧⲱⲛⲕ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲫⲱⲧ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉⲕⲧⲁϩⲟϥ." ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ ϯⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ⲁϥⲟⲩϫⲁⲓ, ⲁϥⲧⲱⲟⲩⲛ, ⲁϥⲧⲁϩⲉ-ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ, ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲣⲏϯ ⲁⲩϣⲉ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ ⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲏⲓ ⲉⲩⲣⲁϣⲓ. |
| There was someone in Egypt who had a paralyzed son. And he brought him and set him in the cell of Apa Makarios, and he left him weeping near the door, and he went to a distance. The monk looked and saw the little boy weeping, and he said to him, "Who brought you here?" And he said, "It was my father. He brought me, he cast me away, and he went." The monk said to him, "Get up and run and catch up to him." And immediately, he became well, and he arose, he caught up to his father, and in this way they went to their house rejoicing. |
Note: The term ⲁⲡⲁ is a title of respect, ultimately from Aramaic ʾabbā, father. ⲙⲁⲕⲁⲣⲓⲟⲥ is a proper name.
26.1 Compound verbs. Coptic vocabulary is particularly rich in compound verbs. Most compound verbs consist of a simple infinitive in the prenominal form plus a nominal element, usually without an article, e.g. ϯ-ⲱⲟⲩ to praise, ϭⲓ-ⲃⲁⲡⲧⲓⲥⲙⲁ to be baptized. Meanings are for the most part predictable from those of the components.
The verbs most frequently occurring in compounds are ϯ- to give, ϭⲓ- to take, ϥⲓ- to raise, carry, ϫⲉⲙ- to find, ⲭⲁ- to put, and ⲉⲣ- to do, make. Some examples:
Compounds with ⲉⲣ- are the most frequent of all and fall into two groups. In the first group ⲉⲣ- has its basic meaning "to do, make, perform":
ⲉⲣ-X ⲛ̀ ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ (X is a number) has two meanings: (1) to reach the age of X; (2) to pass X years.
In the second group of ⲉⲣ- compounds ⲉⲣ- has the meaning "to become", e.g. ⲉⲣ-ⲟⲩⲣⲟ to become king (over: ⲉϫⲉⲛ). The second element may be virtually any noun or adjective in the language, so that a complete catalogue is impossible. Qualitatives are uniformly ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀, as in ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲣⲟ to be king. Further examples:
The distinction between these two groups is often blurred, however, with qualitatives of the ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ type being extended to the first group as well, e.g. ⲉⲣ-ϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ to marvel, become amazed (at: ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, ⲉ, ⲉⲑⲃⲉ, ⲉϫⲉⲛ), to admire; Q ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ϣⲫⲏⲣⲓ to be amazed.
Less frequently the nominal element of a compound verb has the definite article:
In the case of ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲱⲃϣ, ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲙⲉⲩⲓ, and many others of this type a pronominal object is expressed by a possessive prefix on the noun: ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲉϥⲱⲃϣ to forget him, ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲉϥⲙⲉⲩⲓ to remember him.
Because compound verbs employ the prenominal form of the infinitive, the question arises concerning their occurrence in the Bipartite Conjugation, where the prenominal form is usually prohibited. In general, compound verbs are an exception to Jernstedt's Rule and may be used freely as they stand in the Bipartite Conjugation. Two types of compounds, however, do tend to follow Jernstedt's Rule:
the type ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲙⲉⲩⲓ, with the definite article on the noun. In the Bipartite Conjugation the full form of the infinitive is used. Contrast
| ⲁⲓⲉⲣ-ⲡⲉϥⲙⲉⲩⲓ. |
| I remembered him. |
| ϯⲓⲣⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϥⲙⲉⲩⲓ. |
| I remember him. |
many compounds whose nominal element is a part of the body. Contrast
| ⲁⲓϯ-ⲧⲟⲧⲥ. |
| I helped her. |
| ϯϯ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲟⲧⲥ. |
| I am helping her. |
26.2 The element ϣ-, ⲉϣ-, originally a full verb "to know, know how to", may be prefixed to any infinitive to express "can, be able". E.g.
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϣϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ. |
| He was not able to go. |
| ⲛ̀ϯⲛⲁϣϯ-ⲧⲟⲧⲕ ⲁⲛ. |
| I shall not be able to help you. |
It occurs redundantly and optionally in the compounds of ϫⲟⲙ: ⲟⲩⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ, ⲙⲙⲟⲛ(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ, ϫⲉⲙ-(ϣ)ϫⲟⲙ.
26.3 Infinitives of the type ⲧⲁⲕⲟ. There is a fairly large group of verbs whose infinitives begin with ⲧ- and end in -ⲟ, e.g. ⲧⲁⲕⲟ ⲧⲁⲕⲉ- ⲧⲁⲕⲟ⸗ Q ⲧⲁⲕⲏⲟⲩⲧ to destroy. At an older stage of Egyptian these verbs were compound causatives with a form of ϯ (to give) plus a verbal form inflected by suffixation. Thus, the original construction involved two verbs (e.g. I caused that he pay a fine) which coalesced into a single verb with two objects (I caused him to pay a fine). Traces of the older construction survive in Sahidic, e.g. Luke 3:.4 ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲧⲧⲉ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲟⲥⲓ Do not make anyone pay a fine (i.e. suffer a loss). ⲧⲧⲟ ⲧⲧⲉ- is the causative of ϯ itself. The lack of an object marker on the second object is characteristic of the construction, but the absence of an article in this particular example stems from its association with the compound verb ϯ-ⲟⲥⲓ to pay a fine, suffer a loss. In general, however, there is no need to take the older construction into account in Coptic, since most of these verbs are simply transitive. Some examples:
ⲧ + ϣ results in initial ϫ:
Sometimes the initial ⲧ- is lost, as in
A few verbs have retained a final -ⲥ or -ⲟⲩ (a frozen subject suffix):
The Imperative of these verbs may optionally have a prefixed ⲙⲁ-: ⲙⲁⲧⲁⲙⲟ, ⲙⲁⲧⲁⲗⲟ, etc. Cf. §17.1.
(The compound verbs given in 26.1, the prefix ϣ- in 26.2, and the verbs ⲧⲁⲙⲟ, ⲧⲁⲗⲟ, ⲧⲁⲛϧⲟ, ϫⲫⲟ, ϫⲫⲓⲟ, ⲕⲧⲟ, ϫⲉⲩ, and ⲧⲟⲩⲛⲟⲥ in 26.3)
27.1 Negative adjective compounds. The prefix ⲁⲧ- is used to form negative adjectives from verbs and nouns:
| ⲁⲧⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ | ignorant |
| ⲁⲧⲙⲟⲩ | immortal |
| ⲁⲧϩⲏⲧ | senseless, foolish |
| ⲁⲧⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | disobedient |
| ⲁⲧⲧⲁⲕⲟ | imperishable |
| ⲁⲧϫⲟⲙ | powerless, impotent |
| ⲁⲧⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ | invisible |
This prefix was originally a negative relative pronoun; a trace of this older usage is found in the resumptive pronoun required in some expressions, e.g.
| ⲁⲧⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ | unseeable, unseen |
| ⲁⲧⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ | ineffable; without ⲉⲣⲟ⸗: speechless |
| ⲁⲧⲕⲓⲙ ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ | immovable |
The resumptive pronoun agrees with the modified noun:
| ⲟⲩⲙⲩⲥⲧⲏⲣⲓⲟⲛ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲧⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ |
| an ineffable mystery |
| ⲟⲩϫⲟⲙ ⲛ̀ ⲁⲧⲕⲓⲙ ⲉⲣⲟⲥ |
| an immovable power |
Nearly all ⲁⲧ- adjectives freely compound with ⲉⲣ- (Q ⲟⲓ ⲛ̀), as in ⲉⲣ-ⲁⲧⲥⲱⲟⲩⲛ to become/be ignorant, ⲉⲣ-ⲁⲧⲟⲩⲱⲛϩ ⲉⲃⲟⲗ to become/be invisible.
27.2 Compound nouns. The distinction between a compound noun and a noun + ⲛ̀ + noun phrase is somewhat arbitrary. As a working definition we shall assume (1) that the first noun of a true compound noun must be in a reduced form different from the free (unbound) form, if indeed the latter exists; (2) that the linking ⲛ̀ be absent or at least optional. The most productive compounding prefixes are ⲙⲉⲧ-, ⲣⲉⲙ(ⲛ̀)-, ⲣⲉϥ-, and ϫⲓⲛ.
ⲣⲉϥ- forms agent or actor nouns; the second element is normally a simple or compound infinitive, but occasionally a qualitative:
| ⲣⲉϥⲉⲣ-ⲛⲟⲃⲓ | sinner |
| ⲣⲉϥϣⲉⲙϣⲓ | server, worshipper |
| ⲣⲉϥⲙⲱⲟⲩⲧ | dead person |
| ⲣⲉϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ | destroyer; perishable |
| ⲣⲉϥϭⲓⲟⲩⲓ | thief |
These may be used nominally or adjectivally, e.g.
| ⲟⲩⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲉϥⲉⲣ-ⲛⲟⲃⲓ |
| a sinful woman |
| ⲟⲩⲡⲛⲉⲩⲙⲁ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲉϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ |
| a destructive spirit |
| ⲧⲁⲓⲥⲁⲣⲝ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲉϥⲧⲁⲕⲟ |
| this perishable flesh |
and may be formed freely from virtually any appropriate verb in the language.
ⲣⲉⲙ-, ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀-, a reduced form of ⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲛ̀, man of:
| ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ |
| an Egyptian |
| ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ϩⲏⲧ |
| a wise, discerning person |
| ⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲛⲁⲍⲁⲣⲉⲑ |
| a person from Nazareth |
| ⲣⲉⲙⲑⲱⲛ |
| a person from where? as in ⲛⲑⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϩⲁⲛⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲑⲱⲛ? Where are you from? |
ⲙⲉⲧ- is used to form feminine abstract nouns from adjectives or other nouns. Compounds in ⲙⲉⲧ- are extremely numerous; the following is a typical sampling:
| ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲏⲃ | priesthood |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲣⲟ | kingdom, kingship; the spelling ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲣⲟ is less frequent |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲁⲃⲉ | wisdom |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲃⲉⲣⲓ | youth; newness |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ϩⲏⲧ | wisdom, prudence |
| ⲙⲉⲧϧⲉⲗⲗⲟ | old age (of a man) |
| ⲙⲉⲧϧⲉⲗⲗⲱ | old age (of a woman) |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲛⲓϣϯ | greatness; seniority |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲙⲟⲛⲁⲭⲟⲥ | monkhood |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲁⲧⲧⲁⲕⲟ | imperishability; incorruptibility |
ⲙⲉⲧ- is also used to designate languages:
| ⲙⲉⲧⲣⲉⲙⲛ̀ⲭⲏⲙⲓ | Egyptian |
| ⲙⲉⲧϩⲉⲃⲣⲁⲓⲟⲥ | Hebrew |
| ⲙⲉⲧⲟⲩⲉⲉⲓⲉⲛⲓⲛ | Greek |
| ⲙⲉⲧϩⲣⲱⲙⲁⲓⲟⲥ | Latin |
ϫⲓⲛ- is used to form a feminine noun of action or gerund from any infinitive. The meaning ranges from concrete to abstract, e.g. ϫⲓⲛⲛⲁⲩ sight, vision; ϫⲓⲛⲟⲩⲱⲙ food (pl. ϭⲓⲛⲟⲩⲟⲟⲙ). These are so predictable in meaning that they have been systematically excluded from the Glossary unless they have acquired meanings not immediately obvious from that of the base verb.
Les frequent compounding prefixes are ⲁⲛ-, ⲓⲉⲡ- (ⲓⲟⲡⲏ), ⲓⲁϩ- (ⲓⲟϩⲓ), ⲣⲁ- ⲥϯ- (ⲥⲑⲟⲓ), ϣⲟⲩ- (ϣⲁⲩ), ϣⲃⲣ̄- (ϣⲫⲏⲣ), ϣⲛ- (ϣⲏⲣⲓ), ϣⲥ̄ⲛ̄- (ⲥⲁϣ), and ϩⲁⲙ-. The reader may check these out in the Glossary.
Nominalized relative clauses are sometimes taken as compound nouns, occurring with an extra article, e.g.
| (ⲡ)ⲡⲉⲧ ϣⲟⲩⲓⲧ | vanity |
| (ⲡ)ⲡⲉⲧϩⲱⲟⲩ | evil |
| ⲟⲩⲡⲉⲧ ⲟⲩⲁⲃ | a saint |
A similar usage is found with ⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ, designating origin or affiliation (the def. art. appears as ⲡⲉ-, ⲧⲉ-, ⲛⲉ-):
| ⲟⲩⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϩⲛ̄ ⲧⲥⲩⲣⲓⲁ ⲡⲉ. |
| He is a Syrian. |
| ⲛⲉⲃⲟⲗ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲏⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲇⲁⲩⲉⲓⲇ ⲛⲉ. |
| They are the ones from the house of David. |
27.3 There is a form of the verb known as the participium conjunctivum (proclitic participle) used only for forming compounds with a following nominal element:
| p. c. | ||
|---|---|---|
| ⲥⲱ | ⲥⲁⲩ-ⲏⲣⲡ | wine-drinking, a wine-drinker |
| ⲟⲩⲱⲙ | ⲟⲩⲁⲙ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ | man-eating |
| ϭⲓⲥⲓ | ϭⲁⲥⲓ-ϩⲏⲧ | arrogant |
| ⲙⲟⲛⲓ | ⲙⲁⲛ-ⲉⲥⲱⲟⲩ | shepherd, tender of sheep |
It is uniformly vocalized with -ⲁ-. For most verbs the p. c. is rare or non-existent; a few verbs like the above account for most of the examples encountered. Note especially the compounds of ⲙⲉⲓ: ⲙⲁⲓ- (one who loves):
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲱⲟⲩ | desirous of fame or glory |
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲛⲟⲩⲃ, ⲙⲁⲓ-ϩⲁⲧ | desirous of wealth |
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲛⲟⲩϯ | pious, God-loving |
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲣⲱⲙⲓ | kind, philanthropic |
| ⲙⲁⲓ-ⲟⲩⲱⲙ | gluttonous |
27.4 The Third Future and its negative:
| neg. | |
|---|---|
| ⲉⲓⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲕⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉϥⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲥⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲛⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲩⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲛ̀ⲛⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
The negative forms are also spelled as ⲉⲛⲛⲁ-, ⲉⲛⲛⲉⲕ- etc. The 1st pers. sing. also occurs as ⲛⲛⲉⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ.
The Third Future is an emphatic or vivid future with a wide variety of nuances; in an independent clause it describes a future event as necessary, inevitable, or obligatory. The English translation will depend on the context: ⲉϥⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ he shall hear, he is to hear, he is bound to hear, he must inevitably hear, he will surely hear, and similarly for the negative. The 2nd person is often used in commands and prohibitions:
| ⲛ̀ⲛⲉⲕⲡⲉⲓⲣⲁⲍⲉ ⲉ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲡⲉⲕⲛⲟⲩϯ. |
| You shall not tempt the Lord your God. |
| ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲉⲁⲣⲉϩ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓⲉⲛⲧⲟⲗⲏ. |
| You shall keep these commandments. |
One of the most frequent uses of the Third Future is to express purpose or result after the conjunctions ϫⲉ and ϫⲉⲕⲁ(ⲁ)ⲥ:
| ⲁⲓⲥϧⲁⲓ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲛⲉⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ-ⲛⲉⲧⲁⲩϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ. |
| I have written to you so that you may know what has befallen me here. |
| ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩϥ̄ ⲉⲣⲱⲧⲉⲛ ϫⲉ ⲉϥⲉⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ. |
| We shall send him to you so that he may speak with you. |
The same type of clause may be used as an object clause instead of the Inflected Infinitive after verbs of commanding, exhorting, and the like:
| ⲁⲛⲥⲉⲡⲥⲱⲡϥ ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ ⲛ̀ⲛⲉϥϫⲟⲥ ⲉ ϩⲗⲓ. |
| We entreated him not to tell it to anyone. |
It may occasionally replace the Inflected Infinitive in other situations:
| ⲛ̀ϯⲙⲡϣⲁ ⲁⲛ ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ ⲉⲓⲉⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ. |
| I am not worthy to enter. |
The Third Future is tripartite; only the infinitive may be used in the verbal slot. The Second Future is sometimes used instead of the Third Future after ϫⲉⲕⲁⲥ and ϫⲉ.
(The adjectival and nominal compounds given in 27.1, 2.)
28.1 The Habitual and its negative.
| Neg. | |
|---|---|
| ϣⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲣ(ⲉ)ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
The Habitual (or praesens consuetudinis) describes an action or activity as characteristic or habitual. It may usually be translated by the English general present (I write, I work, etc.):
| ϣⲁⲩⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ϫⲉ ⲓⲱⲁⲛⲛⲏⲥ. |
| They call him John. |
| ϣⲁⲣⲉ-ⲧⲥⲟⲫⲓⲁ ⲟⲩⲱϩ ϧⲉⲛ ⲡϩⲏⲧ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲇⲓⲕⲉⲟⲥ. |
| Wisdom resides in the heart of the righteous. |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲉ-ⲏⲣⲡ. |
| He doesn't drink wine. |
The Habitual forms a regular system with the converters:
| Neg. | ||
|---|---|---|
| relative: | ⲉϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉⲧⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲉⲧⲉ ϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| circumstantial: | ⲉ-ϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| imperfect: | ⲛⲉ-ϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲛⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| second tense: | ⲉϣⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | — |
The Habitual is basically tenseless (hence the designation aorist in some grammars) and gains its translation value from the context. The imperfect converter makes a past tense explicit, e.g. ⲛⲉ-ϣⲁϥⲥϧⲁⲓ he used to write. Note that subject resumption is required in the relative form: ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉϣⲁϥⲉⲣ-ⲫⲁⲓ the man who does thus. The Habitual belongs to the Tripartite Conjugation: only the Infinitive may be used in the verbal slot.
28.2 Emphasis. The typical non-emphatic word order in a verbal clause is
(verbal prefix) + subject + verb + object + adverbial elementsWe have seen that the conversion of the verbal prefix to a second tense form places a strong emphasis on the adverbial element, requiring in most cases a cleft sentence in the English translation. The use of the Coptic cleft sentence pattern, with ⲡⲉ, ⲧⲉ, ⲛⲉ + a relative form is a further device for giving special prominence to a subject or object. A somewhat weaker emphasis is achieved by placing a specific element of the clause at the beginning. Such preposed elements are usually resumed pronominally within the clause unless they are simple adverbial phrases. This transformation, known also as fronting or topicalization, is very common in Coptic; examples abound on every page. The element preposed may be completely unmarked as such, but the Greek particle ⲇⲉ is ubiquitous in this function. Fronted personal pronouns are always in the independent form. E.g.
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥϫⲓⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ. |
| Me he did't find. |
| ⲡⲉϥϣⲏⲣⲓ ⲇⲉ ⲁⲩⲣⲁϧⲧϥ. |
| His son, however, they killed. |
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ⲛ̀ϯⲛⲁϯ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲁⲛ ⲙ̀ ⲡϩⲁⲧ. |
| I will not give the money to you. |
The independent pronouns may be used appositionally to emphasize any suffixed pronoun, e.g. ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲁⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲇⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ but when I heard; ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧⲕ ⲛⲑⲟⲕ for your sake. We have already mentioned the repetition in ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲛⲓⲙ ⲛⲑⲟⲕ? Who are you? They may even stand before a relative clause, as in ⲡⲙⲁ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲉϯⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ the place which I am in.
The particles ⲓⲥ and ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ add a certain vividness or immediacy to a following statement. If an element is topicalized, ⲓⲥ generally occurs before nouns and ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ before pronouns.
| ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲧⲃⲱⲕⲓ ⲙ̀ ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ. |
| Behold, I am the maidservant of the Lord. |
| ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲉⲕⲉϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲕⲭⲱ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲕ. |
| Behold, you shall remain (being) mute. (Cf. §30.11) |
| ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲧⲉⲛⲁⲃⲟⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ⲧⲉϫⲫⲟ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ. |
| Behold, you shall conceive and bear a son. |
The translation"behold" is purely conventional, but it is difficult to find a better English equivalent. The forms ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ, ⲉⲓⲥⲧⲉ, ⲉⲓⲥⲡⲉ, and ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ ⲓⲥ also occur. ⲓⲥ has several other functions:
with a following noun, as a complete predication:
| ⲓⲥ ⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲛⲓ. |
| Here is your sister. |
as a "preposition" before temporal expressions, as in
| ⲓⲥ ϣⲟⲙϯ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲛⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ. |
| We have not seen him for three years. |
28.3 Emphatic and intensive pronouns.
ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ⸗, ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ⸗, less frequently ⲟⲩⲁⲧ⸗, is used in apposition to a preceding noun or pronoun: alone, sole, self, only. E.g.
| ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ |
| I alone, I by myself, only I |
| ⲛⲁϥ ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧϥ |
| to him alone, to him only |
| ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧϥ |
| the king himself, the king alone |
ϩⲱ⸗ (1 c.s. ϩⲱ or ϩⲱⲧ, 2 f.s. ϩⲱϯ, 2 c.pl. ϩⲱⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ), similar to the preceding, but often with the added nuance of "also, too, moreover". E.g.
| ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲇⲉ ϩⲱⲕ, ⲡⲁϣⲏⲣⲓ, ⲥⲉⲛⲁⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉⲣⲟⲕ ϫⲉ ⲡⲡⲣⲟⲫⲏⲧⲏⲥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉⲧ ϭⲟⲥⲓ. |
| And you, moreover, my son, will be called the prophet of the Most High. |
| ⲓⲥ ⲉⲗⲓⲥⲁⲃⲉⲧ ⲧⲉⲥⲩⲅⲅⲉⲛⲏⲥ ⲛⲑⲟⲥ ϩⲱⲥ ⲟⲛ ⲁⲥⲃⲟⲕⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩϣⲏⲣⲓ ϧⲉⲛ ⲧⲉⲥⲙⲉⲧϧⲉⲗⲗⲱ. |
| Behold, Elisabeth your kinsman has also conceived a child in her old age. |
The form ϩⲱϥ also serves as an adverb/conjunction "however, on the other hand" without any pronominal force. ⲛⲑⲟϥ is used likewise.
ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, an intensive pronoun, used in apposition to a preceding pronoun, usually possessive or reflexive:
| ⲡⲁⲏⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲓ |
| my own house |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉϥϯⲙⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟϥ |
| in his own village |
28.4 The reciprocal pronoun "each other, one another" is expressed by possessive prefixes on -ⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ (fellow, companion), e.g.
| ⲁⲛⲙⲓϣⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲉⲛⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ. |
| We fought with one another. |
| ⲛⲁⲩⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲛⲟⲩⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ. |
| They were talking with each other. |
28.5 Further remarks on -ⲕⲉ-. In addition to the use of -ⲕⲉ- as an adjective "other, another" introduced in 4.3, -ⲕⲉ- may have a purely emphasizing function, e.g.
| ⲡⲕⲉⲣⲱⲙⲓ |
| the man too |
| the man as well |
Both uses are frequent, and the correct translation will depend on a careful examination of the context.
There is a related set of pronouns: m.s. ϭⲉ or ⲕⲉⲧ, f.s. ⲕⲉⲧⲉ, c.pl. ⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ. These occur alone mostly in negative expressions, e.g. ⲙ̀ⲡⲓⲛⲁⲩ ⲉ ϭⲉ I saw no one else. Otherwise the articles are added, as in ⲧⲕⲉⲧⲉ the other one (f.), ⲛⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ the others, ϩⲁⲛⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ some others. For the indefinite singular ⲕⲉⲟⲩⲁⲓ and f. ⲕⲉⲟⲩⲓ, another (one), are used.
28.6 Nouns with pronominal suffixes. It was noted earlier that there is a small group of nouns which take pronominal suffixes in a possessive sense. Among the more important of these are
28.7 The nouns underlying the directional adverbs of Lesson 8 are used in several other important adverbial and prepositional expressions. With ⲛ̀, ϩⲓ, and ⲥⲁ they form adverbs of static location: e.g. ⲛ̀ ⲃⲟⲗ outside, ϩⲓ ϧⲟⲩⲛ inside, ⲥⲁ-ⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ underneath, below. Each of these may be converted into a prepositional phrase by adding ⲛ̀, ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗: ϩⲓ ⲃⲟⲗ ⲛ̀ outside of, beyond; ⲥⲁ-ϧⲟⲩⲛ ⲛ̀ within, inside of. Nearly all the possible combinations occur: (ⲛ̀, ϩⲓ, ⲥⲁ) + (ⲃⲟⲗ, ϧⲟⲩⲛ, ϩⲣⲏⲓ up, ϩⲣⲏⲓ down, ⲡⲉⲥⲏⲧ, ⲧⲫⲉ, ⲫⲁϩⲟⲩ, ⲡϣⲱⲓ) ± ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗ (sometimes also + ⲉ). Their meanings are usually obvious from the context. The noun ⲡ.ⲥⲁ in these expressions means "side, direction". It is the same ⲥⲁ we have in ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ and ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ. Note also the phrase (ⲛ̀) ⲥⲁ ⲥⲁ ⲛⲓⲃⲉⲛ on every side, everywhich way.
(ⲓⲥ, ⲓⲥ ϩⲏⲡⲡⲉ, ⲙⲁⲩⲁⲧ⸗, ϩⲱ⸗, ⲙ̀ⲙⲓⲛ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟ⸗, ⲭⲁ-ⲣⲱ⸗, ⲑⲉⲙ-ⲣⲱ⸗, ϩⲁⲛⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ, ⲛⲕⲉⲭⲱⲟⲩⲛⲓ, -ⲉⲣⲏⲟⲩ from the lesson)
| ⲁ-ⲟⲩⲁⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲉⲛⲓⲟϯ ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϥⲙⲁⲑⲏⲧⲏⲥ ⲉ ⲙⲁϩ-ⲙⲱⲟⲩ. ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲧϣⲱϯ ⲇⲉ ⲡⲉ ⲟⲩⲏⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲧⲣⲓ ⲉⲙⲁϣⲱ. ⲁϥⲉⲣ-ⲡⲱⲃϣ ⲇⲉ ⲉ ϭⲓ-ⲡⲛⲟϩ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ. ⲛ̄ⲧⲉⲣⲉϥⲓ ⲇⲉ ⲉϫⲉⲛ ⲧϣⲱϯ, ⲁϥⲉⲙⲓ ϫⲉ ⲙ̀ⲡⲉϥⲓⲛⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲛⲟϩ. ⲁϥⲓⲣⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩϣⲗⲏⲗ, ⲁϥⲙⲟⲩϯ ⲉϥϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ϫⲉ, "ⲡϣⲏⲓ, ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲡⲉⲧ ϫⲱ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ ϫⲉ, 'ⲙⲟϩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲅⲅⲓⲟⲛ ⲙ̀ ⲙⲱⲟⲩ.'" ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲛ̀ ϯⲟⲩⲛⲟⲩ ⲁ-ⲡⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲓ ⲉⲡϣⲱⲓ, ⲁ-ⲡⲥⲟⲛ ⲙⲟϩ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲉϥϣⲟϣⲟⲩ, ⲟⲩⲟϩ ⲁ-ⲡⲙⲱⲟⲩ ϩⲉⲙⲥⲓ ⲟⲛ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲙⲁ. |
| One of our fathers sent his disciple to fetch water. But the well was very far from the cell. He forgot to bring the rope with him. And when he came upon the well, he realized that he had not brought the rope with him. He made a prayer and he called out, saying, "Oh cistern, it is my father who says to me, 'fill the bucket with water.'" And immediately, the water came upward, and the brother filled his jug, and the water settled again to its place. |
29.1 The Conditional and conditional clauses.
| ⲁⲓϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | if I hear |
| ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | if you hear |
| ⲁⲣⲉϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. |
| ⲁϥϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲁⲥϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲁⲛϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲁⲩϣⲁⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲁⲣϣⲁⲛ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
Negation is with -ϣⲧⲉⲙ-: ⲁϥϣⲁⲛϣⲧⲉⲙⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲁⲣϣⲁⲛϣⲧⲉⲙ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ. ϣⲁⲛ may be omitted in the negative: ⲁϥϣⲧⲉⲙⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲁⲣⲉϣⲧⲉⲙ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ. The Conditional occurs only in the protasis of conditional sentences. Only the Infinitive may occur in the verbal slot.
Conditional sentences in Coptic fall formally into two clearly defined groups: (1) real, and (2) contrary-to-fact. The protasis of real conditional sentences in present time has a variety of forms:
a clause with the Conditional:
| ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| if you believe this |
ⲉϣⲱⲡ (if) or ⲓⲥϫⲉ (if) followed by the First Present, the Circumstantial, the Conditional, or any type of nonverbal predication:
| ⲉϣⲱⲡ/ⲓⲥϫⲉ | ⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| " | ⲉⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| " | ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| if you believe this | |
| " | ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲉϥⲓⲱⲧ |
| if you are his father | |
| " | ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲕ ⲡϩⲁⲧ |
| if you have the money | |
| " | ⲛ̀ϯⲙⲡϣⲁ ⲁⲛ |
| if I am not worthy | |
the Circumstantial alone often serves as protasis:
| ⲉⲛⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ, … |
| since we are here, … |
The apodosis of such conditions may be any variety of verbal clause appropriate for the required sense (e.g. Fut. I, II, III; Habitual; Imperative). The apodosis may optionally be introduced with ⲓⲉ (ⲉⲉⲓⲉ). For examples, see the exercises.
The protasis of contrary-to-fact conditions is in fact an Imperfect circumstantial clause, or, in the case of nonverbal clauses, a circumstantial of the clause with the imperfect converter:
| ⲉ-ⲛⲁϥⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲣⲟ | if he were king |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲛⲑⲟϥ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲟⲩⲣⲟ | if he were the king |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲟⲩⲟⲛⲧⲁⲛ ⲟⲩⲟⲩⲣⲟ | if we had a king |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ | if you were here |
In past time ⲉ-ⲛⲉ- is followed by the affirmative Second Perfect or negative First Perfect:
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲛⲧⲁⲕϯ-ⲡϩⲁⲧ ⲛⲁⲓ |
| if you had given me the money |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲕϭⲓ-ⲡϩⲁⲧ |
| if you had not taken the money |
If the clause is nonverbal, ⲉ-ⲛⲉ- alone is used. Thus, ⲉ-ⲛⲁⲕⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ means both "if you were here" and "if you had been here".
The conditional prefix ⲉ-ⲛⲉ- is not to be confused with the particle ⲁⲛ which serves to introduce a question, e.g. ⲁⲛ ⲁⲕⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ? Did you see him?
The apodosis of both tenses is in the imperfect of the Future:
| ⲉ-ⲛⲁⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ, ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲫⲁⲓ ⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲁⲛ. |
| If you believed, this would not happen. |
| ⲉ-ⲛⲉ-ⲛⲧⲁⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ, ⲛⲁⲣⲉ-ⲫⲁⲓ ⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲁⲛ. |
| If you had believed, this would not have hapened. |
The Greek conjunctions ⲉⲓⲙⲏⲧⲓ (εἰ μή τι) and ⲕⲁⲛ (κἄν) are also used to introduce protases of both real and contrary-to-fact conditions.
ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲏⲗ ϫⲉ (except that, unless, if not) is often used to introduce the protasis of a contrary-to-fact condition; the clause usually contains a Pres. I, Perf. I, or nonverbal predication:
| ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲏⲗ ϫⲉ | ⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ | if you did not believe |
| " | ⲁⲕⲡⲓⲥⲧⲉⲩⲉ | if you had not believed |
| " | ⲛⲑⲟⲕ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ | if you were not my father |
29.2 Inflected predicate adjectives. There is a small set of predicate adjectives inflected by means of pronominal suffixes or by proclisis to a nominal subject, e.g.
| ⲛⲉⲥⲉ-ⲧⲉϥⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ. | His wife is beautiful. |
| ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲥ. | She is beautiful. |
The more important of these are ⲛⲁⲁ- ⲛⲁⲁ⸗ great, ⲛⲁⲛⲉ- ⲛⲁⲛⲉ⸗ good, ⲛⲉⲥⲉ- ⲛⲉⲥⲱ⸗ beautiful, ⲛⲉⲥⲃⲱⲱ⸗ wise, ⲛⲁϣⲉ- ⲛⲁϣⲱ⸗ numerous, ⲛⲉϭⲱ⸗ ugly. When used in relative clauses, they are treated like the First Present: ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧ ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ the good man, ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉⲧⲉ ⲛⲉⲥⲉ-ⲧⲉϥⲥϩⲓⲙⲓ the man whose wife is beautiful. They may also be preceded by the imperfect and circumstantial converters: ⲛⲉ-ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ (ⲡⲉ) he was good; ⲟⲩⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲉ-ⲛⲁⲛⲉϥ (ⲡⲉ) a good man. ⲛⲁⲓⲁⲧ⸗ (blessed is/are) belongs to this group, but a following nominal subject must be anticipated with a suffix: ⲛⲁⲓⲁⲧⲟⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲣⲉϥⲉⲣ-ⲉⲓⲣⲏⲛⲏ blessed are the peacemakers.
29.3 The comparison of both attributive and predicate adjectives is expressed by placing the preposition ⲉ before the item on which the comparison is based: ⲛⲓϣϯ ⲉ ⲫⲁⲓ greater than this, ⲥⲁⲃⲉ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ wiser than his brothers. In addition to simple adjectives, both Coptic and Greek, the predicate adjectives of the preceding paragraph as well as appropriate qualitatives and other verbal constructions may be used in this construction. E.g.
| ⲛⲁϥⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓϣϯ ⲉ ⲛⲉϥⲥⲛⲏⲟⲩ. |
| He was more important than his brothers. |
| ϥϭⲟⲥⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲉϥϭⲟⲓⲥ. |
| He is more exalted than his master. |
| ⲛⲁϥⲟⲓ ⲛ̀ ⲟⲩⲱⲓⲛⲓ ⲉ ⲡⲣⲏ. |
| It was brighter than the sun. |
| ⲛⲉⲥⲱⲥ ⲉ ⲧⲉⲥⲥⲱⲛⲓ. |
| She is more beautiful than her sister. |
A comparison may be strengthened by using ϩⲟⲩⲟ (more) in various combinations: ⲛ̀ ϩⲟⲩⲟ ⲉ, ⲉ ϩⲟⲩⲟ ⲉ, ⲉ ϩⲟⲩⲉ, all meaning "more than". ⲛ̀ ϩⲟⲩⲟ alone may express an absolute comparative: ⲡⲛⲓϣϯ ⲛ̀ ϩⲟⲩⲟ the greater.
The Greek preposition ⲡⲁⲣⲁ (or ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲣⲁ) may be used instead of ⲉ. Suffixes may be attached: ⲡⲁⲣⲟⲓ, ⲡⲁⲣⲟⲕ, ⲡⲁⲣⲟ etc.
29.4 Nouns with possessive suffixes (continued).
Other nouns used with pronominal suffixes are ⲁⲩⲣⲏϫ⸗ end, ⲕⲉⲛ(ⲧ)⸗ bosom, ⲣⲉⲛ(ⲧ)⸗ name, ⲥⲟⲩⲉⲛ⸗ price, and ϣⲁⲛⲧ⸗ nose. The Glossary may be consulted for these.
(ⲉϣⲱⲡ, ⲓⲥϫⲉ, ⲛ̀ⲥⲁⲃⲏⲗ ϫⲉ, ⲛⲁⲛⲉ-, ⲛⲉⲥⲉ-, ⲛⲁϣⲉ-, ⲛⲁⲓⲁⲧ⸗, ⲛ̀ ϩⲟⲩⲟ ⲉ, ϥⲓ-ϩⲣⲁ⸗, ϣⲁⲛ-ϩⲑⲏ⸗ ⲉϫⲉⲛ, ⲡⲉⲧ ϩⲓⲑⲟⲩⲱ⸗ from the lesson)
30.1 The Injunctive (also called the Optative):
| ⲙⲁⲣⲓⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let me hear | ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let us hear | |
| ⲙⲁⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let him hear | ⲙⲁⲣⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let them hear | |
| ⲙⲁⲣⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let her hear | |||
| ⲙⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | let the man hear |
The Injunctive occurs only in the 1st and 3rd persons in standard Sahidic. The 1st person corresponds to the cohortative, the 3rd person to the jussive; theoretically, the Imperative may be said to occupy the 2nd person position. The negative of the Injunctive is expressed by using the negative Imperative prefix ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣ- with the corresponding form of the Inflected Infinitive: ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲧⲣⲉϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ don't let him go, ⲙ̀ⲡⲉⲣⲧⲣⲉⲩⲙⲟⲟⲩⲧϥ̄ don't let them kill him. The Injunctive is tripartite and is used only with the Infinitive. The free form of the 1st person, ⲙⲁⲣⲟⲛ, is used alone in the sense "Let's go."
30.2 The Future Conjunctive of Result (also called the Finalis).
| — | ⲧⲁⲣⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲧⲁⲣⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲧⲛ̄ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| ⲧⲁⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲧⲁⲣⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
ⲛ̀ may occur optionally before all of these forms. For the 1st person sing. the simple Conjunctive ⲧⲁ- may be used.
The Future Conjunctive is basically a result clause; it is especially frequent after an Imperative, e.g.
| ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲉⲣⲟⲓ ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲕⲉⲣ-ⲥⲁⲃⲉ. | Listen to me and you will become wise (or: so as to become wise). |
Although the Conjunctive itself may occasionally have the value of a result/purpose clause after an Imperative, the Future Conjunctive always has this meaning. The nuance of the form can best be understood if it is viewed as the transformation of an underlying conditional sentence:
| ⲁⲙⲟⲩ ⲧⲁⲣⲉⲕⲛⲁⲩ. | ← | ⲁⲕϣⲁⲛⲓ ⲓⲉ ⲕⲛⲁⲛⲁⲩ. |
It may also occur after a question, e.g.
| ⲛⲓⲙ ⲡⲉⲧⲁϥⲛⲁⲩ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲧⲁⲣⲉϥⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ? |
| Who has seen him so as to be able to describe him? |
If the question is rhetorical, as in this example, negation is generally implied: "No one has seen him so as…." If the question is real, the implication is "Tell me the answer so that…," as in
| ⲉϥⲑⲱⲛ ⲡⲉⲕⲥⲟⲛ ⲧⲁⲣⲛ̄ⲥⲁϫⲓ ⲛⲉⲙⲁϥ? |
| Where is your brother that we may speak with him? |
30.3 The Clause Conjugations. A distinction is made between sentence conjugations (Bipartite and Tripartite) and clause conjugations. The latter are so named because they correspond to a conjunction plus a clause in normal translation. To this category belong the Temporal, the Conjunctive, the Conditional, the Future Conjunctive of Result, and most uses of the Inflected Infinitive (ⲉⲧⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲧⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ, ⲙⲉⲛⲉⲛⲥⲁ ⲧⲣⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ). Characteristic of this category is (1) negation with -ϣⲧⲉⲙ-, and (2) the use of the Infinitive only.
A further clause conjugation is ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ (until he hears):
| ϣⲁⲛϯⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | until I hear | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | until you hear | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | etc. | |
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ϣⲁⲛⲧⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | until the man hears |
Translation is regularly with "until," e.g.
| ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁϭⲱ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲁⲓⲙⲁ ϣⲁⲛⲧⲉϥⲓ. | We shall remain here until he comes. |
Similar in appearance to a clause conjugation is the form ϫⲓⲛ(ⲛ̀)ⲧⲁϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ (from the time that he heard). This consists, however, of the conjunction ϫⲓⲛ followed by the Second Perfect. Even more frequent are the compound expressions with ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ and ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲏϯ (as, according as, just as), both of which are followed by relative constructions, e.g.
| ⲁⲩϩⲉⲓ ⲉⲣⲟϥ ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥϫⲟⲥ ⲛⲱⲟⲩ. | They found it just as he had told them. |
| ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲉⲧⲁⲓⲁⲓⲥ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ, ⲉⲧⲉⲧⲛⲉⲁⲓⲥ ϩⲱⲧ-ⲑⲏⲛⲟⲩ… | According as I have done to you, you too are to do… |
| ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲉⲧ ⲥϧⲏⲟⲩⲧ ⲉⲑⲃⲏⲧϥ | as it is written concerning him |
| ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲉⲧⲟⲩⲛⲁϣⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ ⲙ̀ⲙⲟⲥ | according as they would be able to hear (i.e. understand) |
The feminine resumptive -ⲥ in these constructions refers back to ⲡⲣⲏϯ and should not be translated as a pronominal object. If a real pronominal object is required, the resumptive -ⲥ is omitted, e.g.
| ⲕⲁⲧⲁ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲡⲁⲓⲱⲧ ⲧⲛ̄ⲛⲟⲟⲩⲧ, ⲁⲛⲟⲕ ϩⲱ ϯϫⲉⲩ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲧⲉⲛ. |
| Just as my Father sent me, so I too am sending you. |
Other constructions with ⲑⲉ are treated similarly, e.g.
| ⲫⲁⲓ ⲡⲉ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̄ⲧⲁ-ⲡϭⲟⲓⲥ ⲁⲓⲥ ⲛⲏⲓ. |
| Thus has the Lord acted for me. |
30.4 When the Inflected Infinitive is used instead of a simple Infinitive after a verbal prefix, it has the value of a causative (hence its alternate name, the Causative Infinitive):
| ⲁⲓⲧⲣⲉⲩⲓ ⲉϧⲟⲩⲛ. | I caused them to enter. |
| ϯⲛⲁⲧⲣⲉⲕⲣⲓⲙⲓ. | I shall cause you to weep. |
30.5 The form ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ describes an action as expected but not yet done. It is conveniently translated as "he has not yet heard". The form is fully inflected:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁϯⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ-ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲕⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲧⲉⲛⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ||
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲟⲩⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ | |
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉⲥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ |
It may occur in circumstantial clauses with the circumstantial converter ⲉ-; the resultant form appears ambiguously as ⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ- or simply ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉ-. In this usage it is best translated as an affirmative clause with "before":
| ⲧⲉⲛⲛⲁⲧⲁϩⲟϥ ⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥⲫⲟϩ ⲉ ⲧⲃⲁⲕⲓ. |
| We shall overtake him before he reaches the city. |
With the imperfect converter ⲛⲉ-ⲙ̀ⲡⲁⲧⲉϥⲥⲱⲧⲉⲙ corresponds to the pluperfect: he had not yet heard.
30.6 An untranslatable dative with ⲛⲁ⸗ or ⲉⲣⲟ⸗ occurs optionally with many verbs, especially in the Imperative. This reflexive dative is called the ethical dative, following standard terminology. E.g.
| ϣⲉ ⲛⲁⲕ ⲉ ⲡⲉⲕⲏⲓ. | Go home! |
| ⲥⲱ ⲛⲱⲧⲉⲛ. | Drink! |
Verbs with which this occurs with some frequency are noted in the Glossary.
30.7 Higher numbers, ordinals, and fractions.
| 20 | ϫⲱⲧ (f. ϫⲟⲩⲱⲧⲉ) ϫⲟⲩⲧ- | 70 | ϣϥⲉ, ⲥϣ̄ϥⲉ, ϣⲃⲉ | ||
| 30 | ⲙⲁⲡ (f. ⲙⲁⲁⲃⲉ) ⲙⲁⲡ- | 80 | ϧⲁⲙⲛⲉ, ϩⲙ̄ⲛⲉ- | ||
| 40 | ϩⲙⲉ | 90 | ⲡⲓⲥⲧⲁⲩ | ||
| 50 | ⲧⲁⲓⲟⲩ | 100 | ϣⲉ | 200 | ϣⲏⲧ |
| 60 | ⲥⲉ | 1000 | ϣⲟ | 10,000 | ⲑⲃⲁ |
The tens combine with the forms of the units used in the 'teens (§24.3). The -ⲧ- of -ⲧⲏ (5) is not repeated after another -ⲧ-:
| ϫⲟⲩⲧⲟⲩⲁⲓ | 21 | ⲙⲁⲡⲯⲓⲧ | 39 |
| ϫⲟⲩⲧϯⲟⲩ | 25 | ϣϥⲉϯⲟⲩ | 75 |
An intrusive -ⲧ- appears before -ⲁϥⲧⲉ (4) and -ⲁⲥⲉ (6):
| ⲙⲁⲡϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ | 34 | ⲥⲉⲥⲟⲟⲩ | 66 |
The numbers ϣⲉ 100, ϣⲟ 1000, and ⲑⲃⲁ 10,000 are masculine:
| ϣⲟ ⲥⲛⲁⲩ | 2000 | ⲙⲉⲧⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲑⲃⲁ | 120000 |
| ϣⲟⲙⲧ ⲛ̀ ϣⲟ | 3000 |
Proclitic forms of the units are frequent here, e.g.
| ϣⲙ̄ⲧ-ϣⲟ | 3000 | ⲥⲉⲩ-ϣⲟ | 6000 |
Combinations of these higher numbers with tens and units vary in form, e.g.
| ϣⲉ ⲙⲁⲡ = ϣⲉ ⲛⲉⲙ ⲙⲁⲡ | 130 |
| ⲥⲉⲩ-ϣⲟ ⲟⲩⲟϩ ϣⲙⲏⲛ ⲛ̀ ϣⲉ | 6800 |
Ordinal numbers are formed from the cardinals with the prefix ⲙⲁϩ-. The ordinals are treated as adjectives before the noun with linking ⲛ̀. Gender distinctions are maintained:
| ⲡⲙⲁϩⲥⲛⲁⲩ ⲛ̀ ⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ | the second day |
| ⲧⲙⲁϩⲥⲛⲟⲩϯ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ | the second year |
For "first" the adjectives ϣⲟⲣⲡ (f. ϣⲟⲣⲡⲓ) and ϩⲟⲩⲓⲧ (f. ϩⲟⲩⲓϯ) are used.
Fractional numbers worth noting are ⲧ.ⲫⲁϣⲓ (half) and ϫⲟⲥ, ϫⲉⲥ- (half). Other fractions are expressed by ⲣⲉ- prefixed to the denominator, as in ⲣⲉ-ⲙⲏⲧ one-tenth, or with ⲟⲩⲱⲛ (ⲟⲩⲉⲛ-), as in ⲟⲩⲉⲛ-ⲛ̀-ϥⲧⲱⲟⲩ a fourth.
30.8 The remote (or further) demonstrative pronouns (that) are m.s. ⲫⲏ, f.s. ⲑⲏ, and pl. ⲛⲏ. These occur much less frequently than ⲫⲁⲓ, ⲑⲁⲓ, ⲛⲁⲓ because of the preference for using phrases with ⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ, such as ⲡⲉⲧ ⲙ̀ⲙⲁⲩ.
The prefixal forms ⲡⲓ-, ϯ-, and ⲛⲓ- are usually described as the reduced forms of ⲫⲏ, ⲑⲏ, and ⲛⲏ, parallel in usage to ⲡⲁⲓ-, ⲧⲁⲓ-, and ⲛⲁⲓ-. While such a formal relationship may exist, the use of ⲡⲓ-, ϯ-, and ⲛⲓ- in standard Sahidic is quite restricted. The form ⲡⲓ- occurs mainly in a few temporal and local adverbial expressions, such as ⲙ̀ ⲡⲓⲥⲏⲟⲩ (at that time) and ⲡⲓⲥⲁ (that side, as opposed to this side). The form ⲛⲓ- occurs most frequently in expressions involving comparison with ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ (like) or ⲉⲣ-ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ (to become like); it sometimes corresponds more closely to an English generic noun, e.g. ⲙ̀ ⲡⲣⲏϯ ⲛ̀ ⲛⲓϭⲣⲟⲙⲡⲓ like doves, like a dove. It is also found in the expression ϣⲁ ⲛⲓⲉⲛⲉϩ. Elsewhere ⲡⲓ-, ϯ-, and ⲛⲓ- are frequent as scribal variants of ⲡⲁⲓ-, ⲧⲁⲓ-, ⲛⲁⲓ- or have the force of an emphatic article.
30.9 When it is necessary to express a durative or continuous process or state in the future, a periphrastic construction is employed using the Circumstantial. Contrast
| ⲕⲛⲁⲟⲩⲟⲡ | you will become holy |
| ⲕⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲕⲟⲩⲁⲃ | you will be holy |
| ⲉⲕⲉⲭⲁ-ⲣⲱⲕ | you shall become silent |
| ⲉⲕⲉϣⲱⲡⲓ ⲉⲕⲭⲱ ⲛ̀ ⲣⲱⲕ | you shall remain silent |
The difference is sometimes slight, but not infrequently spelled out. The same construction occasionally appears with other tripartite conjugational forms. A full discussion of the aspectual problem involved here lies beyond the scope of this book.
30.10 Greek conjunctions, adverbs, and prepositions that occur frequently in Coptic (for reference only). The term postpositive means that the word in question must follow immediately after the first element of the sentence, as in ⲡⲣⲱⲙⲓ ⲇⲉ ⲁϥϣⲉ ⲛⲁϥ.
30.11 Final remarks on Coptic conjunctions and particles.
ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ may mean "except" after a negative statement:
| ⲙ̀ⲡⲉ-ϩⲗⲓ ⲙ̀ⲙⲱⲟⲩ ⲧⲟⲩⲃⲟ ⲛ̀ⲥⲁ ⲛⲁⲓⲙⲁⲛ ⲡⲥⲩⲣⲟⲥ. | None of them became cleansed except Naiman the Syrian. |
Certain temporal expressions may occur with a following relative clause without resumptive pronouns. These function virtually as compound conjunctions. E.g.
| ⲡⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲉⲧⲉⲣⲉ-ⲛⲁⲓ ⲛⲁϣⲱⲡⲓ | the day when this will happen |
| ϧⲉⲛ ⲡⲉϩⲟⲟⲩ ⲛ̄ⲧⲁϥϫⲟⲩϣⲧ | on the day when he looked |